[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024247110A1 - Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station - Google Patents

Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024247110A1
WO2024247110A1 PCT/JP2023/020098 JP2023020098W WO2024247110A1 WO 2024247110 A1 WO2024247110 A1 WO 2024247110A1 JP 2023020098 W JP2023020098 W JP 2023020098W WO 2024247110 A1 WO2024247110 A1 WO 2024247110A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
transmission
panel
panels
srs resource
srs
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2023/020098
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
祐輝 松村
聡 永田
ウェイチー スン
ジン ワン
ラン チン
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
NTT Docomo Inc
Original Assignee
NTT Docomo Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by NTT Docomo Inc filed Critical NTT Docomo Inc
Priority to PCT/JP2023/020098 priority Critical patent/WO2024247110A1/en
Publication of WO2024247110A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024247110A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • Non-Patent Document 1 LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified for the purpose of achieving higher capacity and greater sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8, 9).
  • LTE 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G+ 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • NR New Radio
  • a UE will be able to use one of multiple panels (or multiple beams) for uplink (UL) transmission.
  • UL uplink
  • STxMP simultaneous Multi-panel transmission
  • TRPs Transmission/Reception Points
  • one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can appropriately control UL transmission, even when UL transmission is performed using multiple panels.
  • a terminal has a receiver that receives a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission using multiple panels, and a controller that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction, where the switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.
  • UL uplink
  • SRS measurement reference signal
  • UL transmission can be performed appropriately using multiple panels.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of an association between a precoder type and a TPMI index.
  • 2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating an example of a single panel UL transmission.
  • 3A to 3C are diagrams showing examples of methods 1 to 3 of simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels.
  • 4A to 4C are diagrams showing an example of a PUSCH transmission method.
  • 5A to 5C are diagrams showing other examples of the PUSCH transmission method.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous transmission of PUSCH and PUCCH.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a CSI report for multi-group based beam reporting in Rel. 17 NR and later.
  • FIG. 9A-9C show an example of a single TRP single panel transmission.
  • Figures 10A-10C show an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using two panels.
  • FIG. 11 shows an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using all three panels.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using TDM.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SDM.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SFN.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 3-1.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-2.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 3-3.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3.
  • 23A-23B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field/SRS resource indicator field according to embodiments 3-4.
  • 24A and 24B are diagrams showing patterns of UL transmission schemes for each CORESETPoolIndex according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 5-1.
  • FIG. 26A-26B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in an SRS resource set indicator field relating to embodiment 5-2.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
  • PUSCH precoder In NR, it is considered that a UE will support at least one of Codebook (CB)-based transmission and Non-Codebook (NCB)-based transmission.
  • CB Codebook
  • NCB Non-Codebook
  • the UE will use at least a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) for measurement to determine a precoder (precoding matrix) for CB-based and/or NCB-based Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmissions.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • SRI resource indicator
  • precoder precoding matrix
  • the UE may determine a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, a transmitted rank indicator (Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI)), a transmitted precoding matrix indicator (Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI)), etc.
  • a transmitted rank indicator Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI)
  • a transmitted precoding matrix indicator Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI)
  • NCB-based transmission the UE may determine a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.
  • the SRI, TRI, TPMI, etc. may be notified to the UE using Downlink Control Information (DCI).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the SRI may be specified by the SRS Resource Indicator field (SRI field) of the DCI, or by the parameter "srs-ResourceIndicator” included in the RRC information element "ConfiguredGrantConfig" of the configured grant PUSCH.
  • the TRI and TPMI may be specified by the "Precoding information and number of layers" field of the DCI.
  • the UE may report UE capability information regarding the precoder type, and the base station may set the precoder type based on the UE capability information by higher layer signaling.
  • the UE capability information may be information on the precoder type used by the UE in PUSCH transmission (which may be represented by the RRC parameter "pusch-TransCoherence").
  • higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, or any combination thereof.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • the MAC signaling may be, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc.
  • the broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • the UE may determine the precoder to be used for PUSCH transmission based on precoder type information (which may be represented by the RRC parameter "codebookSubset") included in the PUSCH configuration information (the "PUSCH-Config" information element of the RRC signaling) notified by higher layer signaling.
  • the UE may set a subset of the PMI specified by the TPMI by the codebookSubset.
  • the precoder type may be specified by any one of full coherent, partial coherent, and non-coherent, or a combination of at least two of these (e.g., may be expressed by parameters such as "fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent” and "partialAndNonCoherent”).
  • Fully coherent may mean that all antenna ports used for transmission are synchronized (may be expressed as being able to align the phase, using the same precoder, etc.). Partially coherent may mean that some of the antenna ports used for transmission are synchronized, but those some ports cannot be synchronized with other ports. Non-coherent may mean that the antenna ports used for transmission cannot be synchronized.
  • a UE that supports a fully coherent precoder type may be assumed to support partially coherent and non-coherent precoder types.
  • a UE that supports a partially coherent precoder type may be assumed to support a non-coherent precoder type.
  • the precoder type may be interpreted as coherency, PUSCH transmission coherence, coherent type, coherence type, codebook type, codebook subset, codebook subset type, etc.
  • the UE may determine, from multiple precoders (which may also be called precoding matrices, codebooks, etc.) for CB-based transmission, a precoding matrix corresponding to a TPMI index obtained from a DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1, etc.) that schedules an UL transmission.
  • precoders which may also be called precoding matrices, codebooks, etc.
  • a precoding matrix corresponding to a TPMI index obtained from a DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1, etc.) that schedules an UL transmission.
  • Figure 1 shows an example of the association between precoder types and TPMI indexes.
  • Figure 1 corresponds to a table of precoding matrix W for single-layer (rank 1) transmission using four antenna ports in DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform spread OFDM, where transform precoding is enabled).
  • W Discrete Fourier Transform spread OFDM
  • the UE is notified of a TPMI from 0 to 27 for single layer transmission. Also, if the precoder type is partial and noncoherent (partialAndNonCoherent), the UE is set with a TPMI from 0 to 11 for single layer transmission. If the precoder type is noncoherent (nonCoherent), the UE is set with a TPMI from 0 to 3 for single layer transmission.
  • a precoding matrix in which only one component in each column is not zero may be called a noncoherent codebook.
  • a precoding matrix in which a predetermined number (not all) of components in each column are not zero may be called a partially coherent codebook.
  • a precoding matrix in which all components in each column are not zero may be called a fully coherent codebook.
  • Noncoherent and partially coherent codebooks may be referred to as antenna selection precoders.
  • Fully coherent codebooks may be referred to as non-antenna selection precoders.
  • a codebook precoding matrix
  • RRC parameter "codebookSubset” “fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent”
  • a terminal (user terminal, User Equipment (UE)) may receive information (SRS configuration information, for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config") used to transmit a measurement reference signal (for example, a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)).
  • SRS configuration information for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config"
  • SRS-Config parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config”
  • the UE may receive at least one of information regarding one or more SRS resource sets (SRS resource set information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet”) and information regarding one or more SRS resources (SRS resource information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource”).
  • SRS resource set information e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet
  • SRS resource information e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource”
  • An SRS resource set may relate to (group together) a number of SRS resources.
  • Each SRS resource may be identified by an SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) or SRS Resource Identifier (ID).
  • SRI SRS Resource Indicator
  • ID SRS Resource Identifier
  • the SRS resource set information may include an SRS resource set ID (SRS-ResourceSetId), a list of SRS resource IDs (SRS-ResourceId) used in the resource set, an SRS resource type, and information on SRS usage.
  • SRS-ResourceSetId SRS resource set ID
  • SRS-ResourceId SRS resource set ID
  • SRS resource type SRS resource type
  • the SRS resource type may indicate any of periodic SRS (P-SRS), semi-persistent SRS (SP-SRS), and aperiodic CSI (A-SRS).
  • P-SRS periodic SRS
  • SP-SRS semi-persistent SRS
  • A-SRS aperiodic CSI
  • the UE may transmit P-SRS and SP-SRS periodically (or periodically after activation) and transmit A-SRS based on an SRS request in the DCI.
  • the usage may be, for example, beam management (beamManagement), codebook (CB), noncodebook (NCB), antenna switching, etc.
  • the SRS for codebook or noncodebook usage may be used to determine a precoder for codebook-based or noncodebook-based uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) transmission based on the SRI.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the UE may determine a precoder (precoding matrix) for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, a Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI), and a Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI).
  • a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.
  • the SRS resource information may include an SRS resource ID (SRS-ResourceId), SRS port number, SRS port number, transmit comb, SRS resource mapping (e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.), hopping related information, SRS resource type, sequence ID, spatial relationship information of SRS, etc.
  • SRS resource ID SRS-ResourceId
  • SRS port number SRS port number
  • SRS port number SRS port number
  • transmit comb e.g., transmit comb
  • SRS resource mapping e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.
  • SRS resource mapping e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.
  • the spatial relationship information of the SRS may indicate spatial relationship information between a specific reference signal and the SRS.
  • the specific reference signal may be at least one of a Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel (SS/PBCH) block, a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS), and an SRS (e.g., another SRS).
  • SS/PBCH Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • SRS e.g., another SRS.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • the spatial relationship information of the SRS may include at least one of an SSB index, a CSI-RS resource ID, and an SRS resource ID as an index of the above-mentioned specified reference signal.
  • the SSB index, SSB resource ID, and SSB Resource Indicator may be interchangeable.
  • the CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource ID, and CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI) may be interchangeable.
  • the SRS index, SRS resource ID, and SRI may be interchangeable.
  • the spatial relationship information of the SRS may include a serving cell index, a BWP index (BWP ID), etc., corresponding to the above-mentioned specified reference signal.
  • the UE may transmit the SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter for receiving the SSB or CSI-RS (spatial domain receive filter).
  • the UE may assume that the UE receive beam for the SSB or CSI-RS and the UE transmit beam for the SRS are the same.
  • the UE may transmit the target SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmission filter) as the spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmission filter) for transmitting the reference SRS.
  • the UE may assume that the UE transmission beam of the reference SRS and the UE transmission beam of the target SRS are the same.
  • the UE may determine the spatial relationship of the PUSCH scheduled by the DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1) based on the value of a specific field (e.g., an SRS resource identifier (SRI) field) in the DCI. Specifically, the UE may use spatial relationship information of the SRS resource (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") determined based on the value of the specific field (e.g., SRI) for PUSCH transmission.
  • a specific field e.g., an SRS resource identifier (SRI) field
  • the UE when using codebook-based transmission for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a codebook-use SRS resource set having up to two SRS resources, and one of the up to two SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (1-bit SRI field).
  • the transmission beam for PUSCH is specified by the SRI field.
  • the UE may determine the TPMI and number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the precoding information and number of layers field (hereinafter also referred to as the precoding information field).
  • the UE may select a precoder based on the TPMI, number of layers, etc. from an uplink codebook for the same number of ports as the number of SRS ports indicated by the upper layer parameter "nrofSRS-Ports" set for the SRS resource specified by the SRI field.
  • the UE when non-codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a non-codebook-used SRS resource set having up to four SRS resources, and one or more of the up to four SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (2-bit SRI field).
  • the UE may determine the number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the SRI field. For example, the UE may determine that the number of SRS resources specified by the SRI field is the same as the number of layers for the PUSCH. The UE may also calculate a precoder for the SRS resources.
  • the transmission beam of the PUSCH may be calculated based on (the measurement of) the configured associated CSI-RS. Otherwise, the transmission beam of the PUSCH may be specified by the SRI.
  • the UE may be configured to use codebook-based PUSCH transmission or non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission by a higher layer parameter "txConfig" indicating a transmission scheme.
  • the parameter may indicate a value of "codebook” or "nonCodebook.”
  • codebook-based PUSCH (codebook-based PUSCH transmission, codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme in the UE.
  • non-codebook-based PUSCH (non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission, non-codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "non-codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme in the UE.
  • future wireless communication systems e.g., Rel. 18 NR and later
  • simultaneous UL transmission e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)
  • STxMP simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission
  • TRPs transmission/reception points
  • Rel. 18 is considering simultaneous UL transmission using up to 2 TRPs/2 panels. Also, taking into account single DCI-based and multi-DCI-based multi-TRP operation, it is expected that the total number of layers will be up to 4 across all panels, and the total number of codewords will be up to 2 across all panels. Of course, the number of TRPs, panels, layers, and codewords are not limited to these.
  • At least one of the following transmission schemes A and B may be applied to the single panel UL transmission scheme or the single panel UL transmission scheme candidate.
  • the panel/UE panel may be read as a UE capability value set (e.g., UE capability value set) reported for each UE capability.
  • UE capability value set e.g., UE capability value set
  • different panels, different spatial relationships, different joint TCI states, different TPC parameters, different antenna ports, etc. may be read as mutually interchangeable terms.
  • ⁇ Transmission method A Single panel, single TRP, UL transmission>
  • a transmission scheme is used in which a UE transmits UL for one TRP from only one beam and panel at one time (FIG. 2A).
  • ⁇ Transmission method B Single panel multi-TRP UL transmission> In Rel. 17, UL transmission from only one beam and panel at one time and repeated transmission to multiple TRPs is considered (FIG. 2B).
  • the UE transmits PUSCH from panel #1 to TRP #1 (switching beams and panels), and then transmits PUSCH from panel #2 to TRP #2.
  • the two TRPs are connected via an ideal backhaul.
  • Multi-panel transmission In Rel. 18 and later, in order to improve UL throughput/reliability, support for simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels (e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)) for one or more TRPs is being considered. Also, a multi-panel UL transmission scheme is being considered for a specific UL channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH) etc.
  • STxMP simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission
  • codebooks of existing systems e.g., before Rel. 16
  • At least one of the following methods 1 to 3 (multi-panel UL transmission methods 1 to 3) is being considered as a multi-panel UL transmission method or a candidate multi-panel UL transmission method. Only one of transmission methods 1 to 3 may be supported. Multiple methods including at least one of transmission methods 1 to 3 may be supported, and one of the multiple transmission methods may be configured in the UE.
  • ⁇ Transmission method 1 Coherent multi-panel UL transmission> Multiple panels may be synchronized with each other. All layers are mapped to all panels. Multiple analog beams are directed.
  • the SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) field may be extended. This scheme may use up to 4 layers for the UL.
  • the UE maps one codeword (CW) or one transport block (TB) to L layers (PUSCH (1, 2, ..., L)) and transmits L layers from each of the two panels.
  • Panel #1 and panel #2 are coherent. Transmission method 1 can obtain diversity gain.
  • the total number of layers in the two panels is 2L. If the maximum total number of layers is 4, the maximum number of layers in one panel is 2.
  • ⁇ Transmission method 2 Non-coherent multi-panel UL transmission of one codeword (CW) or transport block (TB)> Multiple panels may not be synchronized. Different layers are mapped to different panels and one CW or TB for PUSCH from multiple panels. A layer corresponding to one CW or TB may be mapped to multiple panels.
  • the transmission scheme may use up to 4 layers or up to 8 layers for UL. If up to 8 layers are supported, the transmission scheme may support one CW or TB with up to 8 layers.
  • the UE maps 1 CW or 1 TB to k layers (PUSCH(1, 2, ..., k)) and L-k layers (PUSCH(k+1, k+2, ..., L)), transmits k layers from panel #1, and transmits L-k layers from panel #2.
  • Transmission method 2 can obtain gains through multiplexing and diversity. The total number of layers in the two panels is L.
  • ⁇ Transmission method 3 Non-coherent multi-panel UL transmission of two CWs or TBs> Multiple panels may not be synchronized. Different layers are mapped to different panels and two CWs or TBs for PUSCH from multiple panels. Layers corresponding to one CW or TB may be mapped to one panel. Layers corresponding to multiple CWs or TBs may be mapped to different panels. This transmission scheme may use up to 4 layers or up to 8 layers for UL. When supporting up to 8 layers, this transmission scheme may support up to 4 layers per CW or TB.
  • the UE maps CW#1 or TB#1 to k layers (PUSCH (1, 2, ..., k)), maps CW#2 or TB#2 to L-k layers (PUSCH (k+1, k+2, ..., L)), transmits k layers from panel #1, and transmits L-k layers from panel #2.
  • Transmission method 3 can obtain gains through multiplexing and diversity. The total number of layers in the two panels is L.
  • the base station may configure or indicate panel-specific transmission for UL transmission using UL TCI or panel ID.
  • UL TCI (UL TCI state) may be based on signaling similar to DL beam indication supported in Rel. 15.
  • Panel ID may be implicitly or explicitly applied to transmission of at least one of target RS resource or target RS resource set, PUCCH, SRS, and PRACH. If panel ID is explicitly signaled, panel ID may be configured in at least one of target RS, target channel, and reference RS (e.g., DL RS resource configuration or spatial relationship information).
  • multi-panel UL transmission e.g., Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels (STxMP)
  • STxMP Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels
  • ⁇ Single DCI-based STxMP> In simultaneous multi-panel transmission (STxMP) in a single DCI based multi-TRP system, the following scheme may be applied to UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH).
  • SDM Space Division Multiplexing
  • Different layers/DMRS ports of one PUSCH are precoded separately and transmitted simultaneously from different UE beams/panels (see Figures 4A and 4B).
  • - Space Division Multiplexing (SDM repetition) scheme Two PUSCH transmission opportunities with different redundancy versions (RVs) of the same TB are transmitted simultaneously from two different UE beams/panels on the same time and frequency resources (see Fig. 4C).
  • RVs redundancy versions
  • Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)-A scheme Different portions of the frequency domain resources of one PUSCH transmission occasion (eg, one PUSCH transmission occasion) are transmitted from different UE beams/panels (see FIG. 5A).
  • FDM-B scheme Two PUSCH transmission opportunities with the same/different RV for the same TB are transmitted from different UE beams/panels on non-overlapping frequency domain resources and the same time domain resources (see FIG. 5B).
  • SFN-based transmission scheme all the same layers/DMRS ports of one PUSCH are transmitted simultaneously from two different UE beams/panels (see Fig. 5C).
  • Transmitting multiple TBs may mean transmitting the same TB multiple times, or transmitting different TBs.
  • the UE may assume that the PUSCH repetitive transmissions using Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) are scheduled on the same time and frequency resources. That is, the UE may assume that the PUSCH repetitive transmissions using Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) are scheduled on the same time and frequency resources. When used, repeated PUSCH transmissions using SDM may be transmitted in the same time resource and the same frequency resource.
  • SDM Space Division Multiplexing
  • Figure 4A shows an example of repeated transmission using SDM in one CW.
  • the time and frequency resources of layers #1-2 and #3-4 corresponding to PUSCH/PUCCH are the same.
  • Figure 4B is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using SDM in two CWs.
  • the time and frequency resources of CW#1 and CW#2 corresponding to PUSCH/PUCCH are the same.
  • Figure 4C is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using SDM.
  • the time and frequency resources for PUSCH/PUCCH repetition #1 and repetition #2 are the same.
  • PUSCH transmission using SDM may be configured such that at least a portion of the time and frequency resources overlap.
  • the UE may assume that PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmissions using Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) are scheduled on the same time resources and different frequency resources.
  • FDM Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission using FDM may be transmitted in the same time resource and different frequency resources.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a first example of repeated transmission using FDM (FDM-A).
  • FDM-A FDM-A
  • FIG. 5A shows an example in which one PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission is performed for one TB/UCI.
  • FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a second example of repeated transmission using FDM (FDM-B).
  • FDM-B shows an example in which PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission is performed twice per TB/UCI.
  • Figure 5C is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using a single frequency network (SFN).
  • Figure 5C shows an example in which one PUSCH/PUCCH is transmitted using a different beam/panel for one TB/UCI.
  • SRI indication For simultaneous multi-panel transmission based on spatial division multiplexing of non-codebook-based PUSCH, the following two options are assumed as SRI indication (e.g., SRI indication):
  • SRI combinations may be prescribed from non-codebook SRS resources across two panels.
  • SRS combinations may be indicated, where each SRI combination may be indicated from non-codebook SRS resources of one panel (e.g., NCB SRS resources of one panel).
  • non-codebook SRS resources of one panel e.g., NCB SRS resources of one panel.
  • An SRI combination may include one or more SRS resources (e.g., SRS resources for non-codebooks).
  • SRS resources e.g., SRS resources for non-codebooks.
  • one SRI combination (or SRI field) may indicate the SRI/SRS resources corresponding to each panel.
  • An SRI combination may be read as an SRI set or an SRI group.
  • ⁇ Multi-DCI based STxMP> simultaneous transmission of UL channels/UL signals (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS) (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH, PUSCH+PUCCH, SRS+SRS) is expected to be supported in STxMP in a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP system (see FIG. 6).
  • PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS PUSCH+PUSCH, PUSCH+PUCCH, SRS+SRS
  • the multiple PUSCHs may be multiple PUSCHs (related to STxMP) that are transmitted simultaneously.
  • the multiple PUSCHs may each be associated with a different TRP/panel (see Figure 7).
  • dynamically scheduled PUSCH/PUCCH may mean PUSCH/PUCCH scheduled using a dynamic grant, or PUSCH/PUCCH dynamically scheduled using DCI.
  • the UE may also transmit two independent PUSCHs associated with different TRPs simultaneously in the same active BWP.
  • the total number of layers corresponding to these two PUSCHs may be specified as a maximum of X (or less than or equal to X), where X may be, for example, 4 or some other value.
  • the maximum number of layers for each of the two PUSCHs may be X/2 (for example, 2) or some other value.
  • the SRS resource set and the CORESET pool index may be associated based on a predetermined rule. For example, a first SRS resource set may be associated with a first CORESET pool index (e.g., 0), and another SRS resource set may be associated with a second CORESET pool index (e.g., 1).
  • the PUSCH may be associated with an SRS resource set that has the same CORESER pool index.
  • the PUSCH may be associated with an SRS resource set that is associated with the CORESER pool index of the CORESET that corresponds to the PDCCH that schedules the PUSCH.
  • the method of interpreting the SRI/TPMI field in the DCI may be different for dynamic grant-based PUSCH (e.g., DG-PUSCH) and configuration grant-based PUSCH (e.g., type 2 CG-PUSCH).
  • dynamic grant-based PUSCH e.g., DG-PUSCH
  • configuration grant-based PUSCH e.g., type 2 CG-PUSCH
  • the indicated SRI/TPMI field may correspond to the SRS resource set associated with the same value as the CORESET pool index of the CORESET in which the DCI scheduling the PUSCH (e.g., scheduling DCI format 0_1/0_2) was received.
  • the indicated SRI/TPMI field may correspond to the SRS resource set associated with the same value as the CORESER pool index of the CORESET in which the activation DCI was received.
  • one SRS resource set index may be set in the RRC parameters related to the configuration grant (e.g., ConfiguredGrantConfig), and a specific RRC parameter (e.g., srs-ResourceIndicator/precodingAndNumberOfLayers) may correspond to the SRS resource set.
  • a specific RRC parameter e.g., srs-ResourceIndicator/precodingAndNumberOfLayers
  • asymmetric panels are considered and the number of SRS resources/SRS ports (or number of SRS ports)/max rank (e.g. maxrank)/codebook subset/full power mode are configured separately for the two panels/TRPs.
  • Asymmetric panels may mean that the two panels have different capabilities for number of SRS ports/max rank/codebook subset etc.
  • the predetermined parameters corresponding to the two configured SRS resource sets may be configured separately.
  • the predetermined parameters may be, for example, at least one of the number of SRS resources, the maximum number of maximum rank/SSB index (e.g., maxRank/Lmax), the codebook subset, and the full power mode.
  • beam management-related extensions e.g., beam reports suitable for multiple TRPs, which may also be called extended group-based beam reports
  • user terminals user terminals, User Equipment (UE)
  • UE User Equipment
  • Group-based beam reporting is suitable for cases where multi-TRP transmission, multi-panel reception, etc. are applied, since it can report on a group containing multiple (e.g., two) CRIs/SSBRIs in one report. For example, it can be used to report the best beam for TRP1 as RSRP#1, and the best beam for TRP2 as differential RSRP#2.
  • a UE with groupBasedBeamReporting enabled can only report one group containing two different CRI/SSBRI (which may be read as beam index) for each reporting setting. For this reason, it is expected that the number of groups that can be reported by group-based beam reporting will be expanded for Rel. 17.
  • the resource sets for two channel measurements may be configured/triggered to periodic/semi-persistent/aperiodic resource types.
  • the resource sets for two channel measurements may be, for example, two CSI-SSB-resource sets/two NZP-CSI-RS-resource sets.
  • the UE may be configured to be able to report up to four CRI/SSBRI groups.
  • the number of groups that can be reported (or the number of candidates 1/2/3/4) may be configured by a higher layer parameter (e.g., nrofReportedGroups).
  • Each group may have multiple (e.g., two) CRI/SSBRIs, and the CRI/SSBRIs of each group may be selected from two CSI resource sets (CSI-SSB-resource set/NZP-CSI-RS-resource set) for report setting.
  • the two CRI/SSBRIs of each group may also mean that the UE can receive simultaneously (e.g., receive simultaneously using one spatial domain receive filter).
  • Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of a CSI report when performing extended group-based beam reporting.
  • Figure 8 shows the mapping order of CSI fields included in one report (e.g., the nth CSI report #n) for group-based CSI/RSRP or SSBRI/RSRP reporting.
  • Each group includes multiple (e.g., two) CRIs/SSBRIs.
  • CRI or SSBRI#1 and CRI or SSBRI#2 are reported for each resource group.
  • the CSI field may include a resource set indicator (e.g., Resource Set Indicator).
  • the value of the resource set indicator may indicate the CSI resource set associated with the maximum measured value of L1-RSRP.
  • the value of the resource set indicator may indicate the CSI resource set from which the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group is reported.
  • a 1-bit resource set indicator having a value of 0 or 1 may indicate the first or second CSI resource set, respectively, from which the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group may be reported. All remaining resource groups (e.g., if there are other resource groups to be reported) follow the same mapping order as the first resource group. For example, the CRI or SSBRI#1 of all remaining resource groups may be reported (or selected) from the CSI resource set indicated by the resource set indicator.
  • the CRI or SSBRI#1 of each group may be reported (or selected) from a CSI resource set indicated by a resource set indicator (e.g., a Resource Set Indicator), and the CRI or SSBRI#2 may be reported (or selected) from another CSI resource set.
  • a resource set indicator e.g., a Resource Set Indicator
  • the CRI or SSBRI#2 may be reported (or selected) from another CSI resource set.
  • the CRI or SSBRI#1 and the CRI or SSBRI#2 may be reported from different CSI resource sets.
  • the RSRP corresponding to the beam index (e.g., CRI or SSBRI) of each resource group is reported.
  • the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of a particular group may be reported, and the other RSRP may be a difference from the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of the particular group.
  • the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of a particular group may be the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group.
  • Enhanced group-based beam reporting may be configured (or enabled/activated) by a predetermined upper layer parameter (e.g., groupBasedBeamReporting-r17).
  • enhanced group-based beam reporting may be determined to be enabled when an upper layer parameter regarding the number of groups to report (e.g., nrofReportedGroups-r17) is configured.
  • the maximum supported number of SRS (antenna) ports may be reported as a panel-specific UE capability. This maximum supported number of SRS ports is supported by reporting a UE capability value set index in the L1-RSRP/L1-SINR report.
  • the "maximum supported number of SRS (antenna) ports” may be read as the maximum number of supported SRS ports, the maximum supported number of SRS ports, etc.
  • the index of the UE capability set indicating the maximum number of SRS ports supported is reported together with the SSBRI/CRI and L1-RSRP pair.
  • the UE must expect the nrofSRS-Ports (number of SRS ports) of the two indicated SRS resources to be the same. Also, if two SRS resource sets are configured in srs-ResourceSetToAddModList or srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2 and the upper layer parameter usage in SRS-ResourceSet is set to nonCodebook, the UE is not expected to configure different numbers of SRS resources in the two SRS resource sets.
  • simultaneous multi-panel transmission in a single DCI-based multi-TRP system supports UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH transmission) using SDM/SFN.
  • UL transmission e.g., PUSCH transmission
  • two CB/NCB SRS resource sets can be configured.
  • two SRI/TPMI fields can be indicated.
  • Rel. 18 does not support multi-TRP PUSCH transmission using two asymmetric panels with different capabilities (e.g., different number of SRS ports).
  • the two SRS resources indicated by the two SRIs should have the same number of ports.
  • the two SRS resource sets should have the same number of SRS resources.
  • Panel-specific parameters in UL transmission may be determined based on at least one of the following options 1 to 6.
  • a panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability value set may be associated/configured with an SRS resource set/SRS resource.
  • a panel-specific parameter for a PUSCH transmission may be determined from an SRS resource set indicated by an SRS resource set indicator/SRS resource indicated by an SRS resource indicator (SRI) corresponding to the PUSCH transmission.
  • SRI SRS resource indicator
  • Panel-specific parameters/panel indices/UE capability value sets may be associated/configured to joint TCI/UL TCI.
  • panel-specific parameters for a UL transmission may be determined from the joint TCI/UL TCI corresponding to the UL transmission.
  • Panel specific parameters/panel index/UE capability set may be associated/configured to a resource/resource set of a certain reference signal (e.g. SSB/CSI-RS/SRS).
  • panel specific parameters for UL transmission may be determined from the QCL source RS/PL RS (path loss reference signal) corresponding to the UL transmission.
  • the panel-specific parameters may be associated/configured to a UE capability value set (index).
  • the panel-specific parameters for a UL transmission may be determined from the QCL source RS/PL RS (path loss reference signal) corresponding to the UL transmission and the UE capability value set (index) reported for the reference signal in a beam report.
  • the panel-specific parameters/panel index/UE capability value set (index) may be directly indicated in the scheduling information (e.g., scheduling DCI for UL transmission).
  • a panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability set may be associated with a group-based beam report, e.g., a panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability set (index) may be associated with each beam/pair of beams in a DL group-based beam report where the pair of beams may be received simultaneously, or may be associated with each beam/pair of beams in a Rel. 18 UL group-based beam report where the pair of beams may be transmitted simultaneously.
  • the panel-specific parameters may refer to at least one of the following: number of SRS ports/number of SRS resources/full power mode/codebook subset.
  • the above-mentioned single DCI-based multi-TRP with TDM repetitive transmission, single DCI-based multi-TRP with SDM/SFN STxMP there may be asymmetric panels, i.e., the UE has two panels with different capabilities.
  • the UE has two or more panels and switches between multiple panels. More specifically, consider a case where the UE has three panels, each with two, two, and four ports, respectively.
  • the panel switch may be due to UE movement or activation/deactivation of the UE panel.
  • ⁇ Question 2> Furthermore, it is required to dynamically switch UL transmission for each of the above-mentioned multiple (e.g., two) panels. In this case, it is necessary to specify specific field contents of DCI that instructs panel switching.
  • the base station (gNB) can update the QCL of SRS resource set #0 and apply SRS resource set #0 to panel #1.
  • the correspondence between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource set should also be switchable.
  • STxMP which is applied to two or more panels, may be further expanded in the future.
  • UEs will perform UL transmission using multiple beams/panels/TRPs (e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)).
  • STxMP simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission
  • the inventors therefore came up with a method to solve these problems.
  • A/B and “at least one of A and B” may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • A/B/C may mean “at least one of A, B, and C.”
  • Radio Resource Control RRC
  • RRC parameters RRC parameters
  • RRC messages higher layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc.
  • IEs information elements
  • CE Medium Access Control
  • update commands activation/deactivation commands, etc.
  • the higher layer signaling may be, for example, any one of Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocols (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • LPP LTE Positioning Protocol
  • the MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc.
  • the broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • RMSI Remaining Minimum System Information
  • OSI System Information
  • the physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • multi-TRP, multi-TRP system, multi-TRP transmission, multi-PDSCH, channel using multi-TRP, channel using multiple TCI states/spatial relationships, multi-TRP enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships enabled by RRC/DCI, and at least one of multi-TRP based on a single DCI and multi-TRP based on multiple DCI may be read as interchangeable.
  • multi-TRP based on multi-DCI, and a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 is set for the CORESET may be read as interchangeable.
  • multi-TRP based on a single DCI, and at least one code point of the TCI field is mapped to two TCI states may be read as interchangeable.
  • single TRP, single DCI, single PDCCH, multi-TRP based on single DCI, single TRP system, single TRP transmission, single PDSCH, channel using single TRP, channel using one TCI state/spatial relationship, multi-TRP not being enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships not being enabled by RRC/DCI, a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 not being set for any CORESET and no code point in the TCI field being mapped to two TCI states, and two TCI states on at least one TCI code point being activated may be read as interchangeable.
  • panel UE capability value set (e.g., UE capability value set), TRP, SRS resource set, CORESET pool index, beam group, TCI state group, spatial relationship group, reference signal group, path loss RS group, antenna, antenna port, UL transmit spatial filter, and UL spatial domain filter may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • STxMP simultaneous UL transmission using multi-panel
  • UL transmission multiple UL transmissions
  • UL transmission multiple UL transmissions
  • UL transmission in at least the same time resource/domain using multi-TRP
  • UL transmission in at least the same time resource/domain for multi-TRP
  • ignore, drop, abort, cancel, puncture, rate match, postpone, do not transmit, etc. may be read as interchangeable.
  • UL channel UL signal
  • UL transmission may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • a UE may transmit one or more UL signals/channels using multiple panels, at least in the same time domain (e.g., same time resource/symbol/slot/sub-slot), which may be referred to hereinafter in this disclosure as STxMP (operation/scheme).
  • STxMP operation/scheme
  • the transmission of one or more UL signals/channels may simply be referred to as a UL transmission.
  • UL transmission, STxMP, and UL transmission using (applying) TDM/SDM/SFN may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • an asymmetric UE panel may mean, for example, having different capabilities between multiple panels in terms of maximum number of SRS ports/maximum number of SRS resources/maximum rank/full power mode/codebook subset/coherent type, etc.
  • a symmetric UE panel may mean having the same capabilities between multiple panels in terms of maximum number of SRS ports/maximum number of SRS resources/maximum rank/full power mode/codebook subset/coherent type, etc.
  • repeated transmission and transmission may be read as interchangeable.
  • panel switching may be indicated by a DCI (scheduling/triggering DCI) that schedules/triggers an UL channel/signal.
  • DCI scheduling/triggering DCI
  • PUSCH transmission is mainly exemplified as UL transmission, but PUCCH transmission and SRS transmission can also be applied to UL transmission.
  • the first embodiment relates to problem 1 above and describes a combination of multiple panels.
  • a multi-panel UE (a UE that supports/has multiple panels) can support at least one of the following cases 1 to 6.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., three) panels, each of which may have different capabilities than the other panels, i.e., the multiple panels may be asymmetric with respect to each other.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels may be 1, 2, and 4.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., three) panels, where two of the three panels may have the same capabilities and the other panel may have a different capability from the two panels, i.e., the two panels with the same capabilities may be symmetric panels and the other panel may be asymmetric with respect to the two panels.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels may be 2, 2, and 4.
  • panels #0 and #1 may be symmetric panels
  • panel #2 may be an asymmetric panel.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., four) panels, each of which may have different capabilities than the other panels, i.e., the multiple panels may be asymmetric with respect to each other.
  • the capabilities (number of SRS ports/coherence type) of each of the four panels may be one-port or two-port coherent transmission, four-port fully coherent transmission, or four-port partially coherent transmission.
  • panels #2 and #3 both have four SRS ports, but different coherence types (fully coherent/partially coherent). For this reason, panels #2 and #3 have different capabilities and constitute asymmetric panels.
  • case 3 shows an example of configuring an asymmetric panel by using different coherent types even if the number of ports is the same between panels.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., four) panels, which may be divided into multiple groups with different capabilities, and each panel in the same group may have the same capabilities.
  • Case 4-1 shows an example in which two panels belong to one group.
  • the two panels (panels #0 and #1) belonging to group #0 may have the same capabilities.
  • the two panels (panels #2 and #3) belonging to group #1 may have the same capabilities.
  • groups #0 and #1 have different capabilities.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the four panels may be 2, 2, 4, and 4. That is, in this example, panels #0 and #1, which have the same number of ports (2), are symmetrical panels, and panels #2 and #3, which have the same number of ports (4), are symmetrical panels. On the other hand, panels #0/#1 (group #0) and panels #2/#3 (group #1) are asymmetrical panels.
  • Case 4-2 shows an example in which three panels (panels #0 to #2) belong to one group #0, and one panel #3 belongs to the other group #1.
  • the three panels (panels #0 to #2) belonging to group #0 may have the same capabilities.
  • groups #0 and #1 have different capabilities.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the four panels may be 2, 2, 2, and 4. That is, in this example, panels #0, #1, and #2, which have the same number of ports (2), are symmetrical panels. On the other hand, panels #0/#1/#2 (group #0) and panel #3 (group #1) are asymmetrical panels.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., M) panels.
  • the M panels may be divided into multiple (e.g., N) groups, where N may be less than or equal to M.
  • Each group may have different capabilities.
  • Each panel in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, the panels may have different capabilities between different groups and the same capabilities within the same group. In other words, the panels may constitute asymmetric panels between different groups and symmetric panels within the same group.
  • the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions among multiple (e.g., M) panels, all of which may have the same capabilities, i.e., the M panels may be symmetrical to one another.
  • M multiple (e.g., M) panels, all of which may have the same capabilities, i.e., the M panels may be symmetrical to one another.
  • the second embodiment relates to problem 1 above and describes a UL transmission scheme utilizing multiple panels.
  • the second embodiment is broadly divided into embodiments 2-1 to 2-3. Each of the embodiments 2-1 to 2-3 may be applied alone or in combination.
  • the embodiment 2-1 relates to repeated transmission of a PUSCH using TDM.
  • single DCI-based multi-TRP when PUSCH repetition transmission (single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repetition) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-1-1 to 2-1-4) between M (M>2) panels.
  • the one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.
  • Different PUSCH repeat transmissions may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs.
  • the two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels.
  • the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.
  • the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported.
  • the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with panel #1/#2.
  • the X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from among the M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from among the M panels.
  • the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more panel groups may be selected.
  • the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported.
  • the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with at least one of panels #1 to #X.
  • Different PUSCH repeat transmissions may be sent from different panels to different TRPs.
  • the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported.
  • the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with at least one of panels #1 to #M.
  • the embodiment 2-2 relates to simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SDM.
  • single DCI-based multi-TRP when simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission with SDM (single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH scheme) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-2-1 to 2-2-4) between M (M>2) panels.
  • the one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.
  • Different layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs.
  • the two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels.
  • the total number C of candidates for the panel group may be represented as C(M, 2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.
  • the X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from among the M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from among the M panels.
  • the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.
  • Different layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs.
  • Embodiment 2-3 relates to simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SFM.
  • single DCI-based multi-TRP when simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission with SFN (single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH scheme) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-3-1 to 2-3-4) between M (M>2) panels.
  • (2-3-1) Single TRP single panel PUSCH transmission using one of M panels.
  • the one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.
  • All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from two panels.
  • the two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels.
  • the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M, 2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more panel groups may be selected.
  • All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from X panels.
  • the X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from M panels.
  • the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.
  • the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.
  • (2-3-4) - Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission utilizing all M panels.
  • All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from M panels.
  • FIG. 9A-9C are diagrams showing an example of single TRP single panel transmission.
  • FIG. 9 corresponds to the above-mentioned UL transmission scheme 2-1-1/2-2-1/2-3-1. Also, in FIG. 9, the case where the number of ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4 is described, but this is not limited thereto. The number of ports of each panel can be changed as appropriate.
  • the UE may select panel #0 from among the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #0.
  • the UE may select panel #1 from among the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #1 toward TRP #0.
  • the UE may select panel #2 from the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #1.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0/#1 to TRP #1.
  • the UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #0.
  • Figures 10A-10C show an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using two panels.
  • Figure 10 corresponds to the UL transmission scheme 2-1-2/2-2-2/2-3-2 described above. Also, the number of ports on each panel in Figure 10 is the same as in Figure 9.
  • the UE may select panels #0 and #1 from among the three panels.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.
  • the UE may select panels #0 and #2 from among the three panels.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.
  • the UE may select panels #1 and #2 from among the three panels.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #0, and may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #1.
  • the UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #0. In other words, it is preferable that UL transmission from each panel is performed toward a different TRP.
  • Figure 11 shows an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using three (all) panels.
  • Figure 11 corresponds to the UL transmission scheme 2-1-3/2-2-3/2-3-3/2-1-4/2-2-4/2-3-4 described above.
  • the number of ports on each panel in Figure 10 is the same as in Figure 9.
  • the UE may select panels #0, #1, and #2 (all three panels) from among the three panels.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #1/#2.
  • the UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #1 toward TRP #0/#2.
  • the UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #0/#1. In other words, it is preferable that UL transmission from each panel is performed toward a different TRP.
  • ⁇ UL transmission scheme pattern> A pattern of a UL transmission scheme that supports dynamic switching will be described with reference to Figures 12 to 14. Although a case of three panels (panels #1 to #3) is illustrated in Figures 12 to 14, the number of panels is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Also, although panel indexes (IDs) are shown as #1 to #3 in Figures 12 to 14, the panel indexes may be read as #0 to #2.
  • the UL transmission scheme using TDM can be exemplified by the following patterns: - Single TRP single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3. - Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #1 and #2 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#2). - Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #1 and #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#3). - Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #2 and #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #2/#3). - Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using three panels #1 to #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#2/#3).
  • All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 12 may not be supported, and only a subset of the schemes shown in FIG. 12 may be supported.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SDM.
  • the UL transmission scheme using SDM can be exemplified by the following patterns: - Single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3. -STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #1 and #2. -STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #1 and #3. -STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #2 and #3. -STxMP SDM transmission using three panels #1 to #3.
  • All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 13 may not be supported, and only a subset of the schemes shown in FIG. 13 may be supported.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SFN.
  • the UL transmission scheme using SFN can be exemplified by the following patterns: - Single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3. -STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #1 and #2. -STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #1 and #3. -STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #2 and #3. -STxMP SFN transmission using three panels #1 to #3.
  • All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 14 may not be supported, and only a subset of FIG. 14 may be supported.
  • the third embodiment describes a method for switching UL transmission schemes to which multiple panels are applied, with respect to the above-mentioned problem 1.
  • the third embodiment illustrates dynamic switching between panels in a case where the number of panels M is greater than 2 (e.g., 3).
  • the numbers of panels/TRP/SRS ports described below are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.
  • the third embodiment is broadly divided into embodiments 3-1 to 3-3. Each of the embodiments 3-1 to 3-3 may be applied alone or in combination.
  • One SRS resource set can apply different parameters (eg, number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) to different panels based on dynamic instructions from the network (NW).
  • NW network
  • One SRS resource set may be semi-statically configured with a set of multiple parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) for multiple panels.
  • the NW may dynamically instruct/update the association between the SRS resource set and the panel.
  • the UE may apply the updated set of parameters to one SRS resource set based on the instruction.
  • the parameters of one SRS resource may be dynamically instructed/updated by the NW.
  • Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-1. As shown in Fig. 15, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.
  • SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters.
  • SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.
  • SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as parameters.
  • SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.
  • the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #1 from 2 to 4. The UE may also apply the updated SRS resource set #1 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #1 and the panel from panel #1 to panel #2.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.
  • two CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured to support two panels/TRPs.
  • an SRS resource set of X CBs/NCBs may be configured to support X panels/TRPs, which is greater than 2.
  • a single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission utilizing X panels/TRPs may mean that multiple repeat transmissions are associated with X panels/TRPs, with different repeat transmissions associated with different panels/TRPs.
  • single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM may mean that multiple layers of one PUSCH are associated with X panels/TRPs, with different layers associated with different panels/TRPs.
  • single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN may mean that all layers of one PUSCH are associated with X panels/TRPs.
  • M CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured. Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel.
  • an SRS resource set indicator field (which may be referred to as a field/specific field) may be used.
  • the specific field may be included in, for example, a DCI and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 4.
  • the following options 1 to 4 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set is indicated.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource set selected from the M SRS resource sets.
  • the selected one SRS resource set may be any SRS resource set among the M SRS resource sets. Also, the selected SRS resource set is not limited to one, and may be several SRS resource sets.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from among the M SRS resource sets.
  • the two SRS resource sets may be any pair of SRS resource sets (which may be referred to as an SRS resource set group) selected from among the M SRS resource sets.
  • the total number C of candidates for the SRS resource set group may be represented as C(M, 2), where M may represent the total number of SRS resource sets and 2 may represent the number of SRS resource sets per SRS resource set group.
  • the number of SRS resource set groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more SRS resource set groups may be selected.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2 ⁇ X ⁇ M) SRS resource sets selected from among the M SRS resource sets.
  • the X SRS resource sets may be any SRS resource set group (which may be referred to as an SRS resource set group) selected from among the M SRS resource sets.
  • the total number C of candidates for the SRS resource set group may be represented as C(M,X), where M may represent the total number of SRS resource sets and X may represent the number of SRS resource sets per SRS resource set group.
  • the number of SRS resource set groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more SRS resource set groups may be selected.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with all M SRS resource sets.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.
  • the above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE).
  • the SRS resource sets of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and M SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE.
  • M may be an integer of 2 or more
  • L may be an integer of M or more.
  • Fig. 16 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-2. As shown in Fig. 16, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.
  • SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters.
  • SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.
  • SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as parameters.
  • SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.
  • the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may switch the SRS resource set from SRS resource set #1 to SRS resource set #2.
  • SRS resource set #2 may be associated with panel #2.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1 based on the association between the switched SRS resource set #2 and panel #2.
  • embodiment 3-2 shown in FIG. 16 shows an example in which panel switching is achieved by switching SRS resource set #1 corresponding to panel #1 before switching to SRS resource set #2 corresponding to panel #2 at the switching destination.
  • FIGS. 17 to 19 are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2.
  • the correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 may be changed (rearranged).
  • the 1st/2nd/3rd/4th SRS resource sets may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource sets.
  • FIG. 17 shows an example in which at least one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • a specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set using a 3-bit field value.
  • code points 000/001/010 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of three SRS resource sets.
  • Code points 011/100/101/110 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of three SRS resource sets.
  • the remaining code point 111 may be reserved.
  • FIG. 18 shows an example in which at least one of four SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • a specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set using a value from 0 to 15.
  • code points 0-3 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of four SRS resource sets.
  • Code points 4-9 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of four SRS resource sets.
  • Code points 10-13 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with three of four SRS resource sets.
  • Code point 14 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with four SRS resource sets.
  • the remaining code point 15 may be Reserved.
  • FIG. 19 shows an example in which at least one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission (e.g., PUSCH repeated transmission using TDM).
  • a specific code point may indicate an association between a specific PUSCH transmission and an SRS resource set using a value from 0 to 15.
  • code points 0-2 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of three SRS resource sets.
  • Code points 3-8 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of three SRS resource sets, with the first repeat transmission associated with one of the two.
  • Code points 9-11 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission scheme is associated with three SRS resource sets, with the first repeat transmission associated with one of the three.
  • the remaining code points 12-15 may be reserved.
  • Embodiment 3-3 may be applied only to the CB's PUSH and may not be applied to the NCB's PUSH.
  • N may be equal to or less than M.
  • Panels in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, panels belonging to the same group may form symmetrical panels. Also, different groups may have different capabilities. That is, panels across groups may form asymmetrical panels.
  • N CB/NCB SRS resource sets corresponding to the number of divided groups may be set.
  • Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel group (panel group) having the same capabilities.
  • the above-mentioned groups and panel groups may be read as interchangeable.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field (which may also be referred to as a field/specific field) may be utilized to indicate dynamic switching between UL transmission schemes.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may be included in the DCI, for example, and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 6.
  • the following options 1 to 6 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set (SRS resource) is indicated.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set selected from the N SRS resource sets.
  • the one SRS resource may be arbitrarily selected from the selected one SRS resource set.
  • Option 1 (PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a single panel transmission.
  • Option 2 A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set selected from N SRS resource sets.
  • the two SRS resources may have the same capability since they may be selected from the same (single) SRS resource set. That is, option 2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may mean a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels (symmetric panels) with the same capability.
  • Option 3 A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X SRS resource sets (X is greater than 2) in one SRS resource set selected from N SRS resource sets.
  • the X SRS resources may have the same capability since they may be selected from the same (single) SRS resource set. That is, option 3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resources in one SRS resource set) may mean a multi-panel transmission utilizing X panels (symmetric panels) with the same capability.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from the N SRS resource sets, where the two SRS resource sets may have different capabilities. That is, option 4 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2 ⁇ X ⁇ N) SRS resource sets selected from N SRS resource sets, where the X SRS resource sets may have different capabilities. That is, option 5 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing X (2 or more) panels (asymmetric panels) with different capabilities.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with all N SRS resource sets, where the N SRS resource sets may have different capabilities, i.e., option 6 (PUSCH transmission is associated with all N SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing N panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).
  • the above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set/SRS resource may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE).
  • the SRS resource set of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and N SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE.
  • X SRS resources may be set/instructed from the N SRS resource sets by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI).
  • the UE can appropriately select the SRS resource set (SRS resource), and further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the UE/NW.
  • Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-3. As shown in Fig. 20, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.
  • SRS resource set #0 is associated/contains two SRS resources (SRS resources #0, #1) with two ports (having two SRS ports).
  • SRS resource #0 is associated with panel #0
  • SRS resource #1 is associated with panel #1.
  • panels #0 and #1 may belong to the same panel group, i.e., panels #0 and #1 may constitute symmetric panels with the same capabilities.
  • the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW.
  • the UE may switch the SRS resource set/SRS resource based on the instruction.
  • SRS resource set #0 may be associated with/include only one SRS resource having two ports.
  • This SRS resource (SRS resource set #0) may be associated with panel #0.
  • SRS resource set #1 may be associated with/include only one SRS resource having four ports.
  • This SRS resource (SRS resource set #1) may be associated with panel #2.
  • panels #0 and #2 may constitute asymmetric panels with different capabilities.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1 based on the association between the switched SRS resource set #1 and panel #2.
  • embodiment 3-3 shown in FIG. 20 shows an example of achieving panel switching by switching SRS resource set #0 (2-port SRS resource #1) corresponding to panel #1 before switching to SRS resource set #2 (4-port SRS resource) corresponding to panel #2 at the switching destination.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3. Note that the correspondence (combination) between the code points and the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 may be changed (rearranged). Also, the 1st/2nd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource sets. Also, it is not necessary for all of the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 to be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.
  • FIG. 21 shows an example where the number of panels is three and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • the first SRS resource set may be associated with the two panels, and the second resource set may be associated with the other panel.
  • a particular code point may indicate the association of a particular PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 2-bit field value.
  • code point 00/01 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource selected from the first/second SRS resource set.
  • Code point 10 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources selected from the first SRS resource set.
  • Code point 11 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example where the number of panels is four and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • the first SRS resource set may be associated with the two panels, and the second resource set may be associated with the other two panels.
  • a specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 3-bit field value.
  • code points 000/001 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource selected from the first/second SRS resource set.
  • Code points 010/011 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources selected from the first/second SRS resource set.
  • Code point 101 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets.
  • the extra code points 110/111 may be reserved.
  • the number of bits for panel switching instructions may be increased or decreased depending on the number of panels/number of SRS resource sets, etc.
  • Embodiments 3-4 may be applied only to the PUSH of the CB, and may not be applied to the PUSH of the NCB.
  • N may be equal to or less than M.
  • Panels in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, panels belonging to the same group may form symmetrical panels. Also, different groups may have different capabilities. That is, panels across groups may form asymmetrical panels.
  • N CB/NCB SRS resource sets corresponding to the number of divided groups may be set.
  • Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel group (panel group) having the same capabilities.
  • the above-mentioned groups and panel groups may be read as interchangeable.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field (which may also be referred to as a field/specific field) may be utilized to indicate dynamic switching between UL transmission schemes.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may be included in the DCI, for example, and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 4.
  • the following options 1 to 4 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set (SRS resource) is indicated.
  • Option 1 A PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource set selected from the N SRS resource sets, in which case an SRS resource indicator (SRI) may indicate at least one of the following options 1-1 to 1-3.
  • SRI SRS resource indicator
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource selected from one SRS resource set.
  • Option 1-1 (PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a single panel transmission.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resources selected from one SRS resource set.
  • Option 1-2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with the same capabilities (symmetric panels).
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with X SRS resources (X is greater than 2) selected from one SRS resource set.
  • Options 1-3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may refer to multi-panel transmission utilizing X panels (symmetric panels) with the same capabilities.
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from among the N SRS resource sets.
  • Option 2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2 ⁇ X ⁇ N) SRS resource sets selected from among N SRS resource sets.
  • Option 3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing X (greater than or equal to 2) panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).
  • a PUSCH transmission may be associated with all N SRS resource sets, where the N SRS resource sets may have different capabilities, i.e., option 6 (PUSCH transmission is associated with all N SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing N panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).
  • the above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set/SRS resource may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE).
  • the SRS resource set of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and N SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE.
  • X SRS resources may be set/instructed from the N SRS resource sets by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI).
  • the UE can appropriately select the SRS resource set (SRS resource), and further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the UE/NW.
  • 23A-23B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field/SRS resource indicator field according to embodiments 3-4.
  • the correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 23A-23B may be changed (rearranged).
  • the 1st/2nd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource set.
  • the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 23A-23B may not all be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.
  • Figures 23A and 23B show an example where the number of panels is three and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • Figure 23A corresponds to the SRS resource set indicator field
  • Figure 23B corresponds to the SRS resource indicator field (SRI field).
  • the first SRS resource set may be associated with two panels
  • the second resource set may be associated with the other panel.
  • a particular code point may indicate the association of a particular PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 2-bit field value.
  • code points 00/01 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource set.
  • Code point 10 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets.
  • the redundant code point 11 may be reserved.
  • code points 00/01 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource selected from the first SRS resource set.
  • Code point 10 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two (first and second) SRS resources selected from the first SRS resource set.
  • the redundant code point 11 may be reserved.
  • the UE can realize panel switching according to a plurality of cases in which a plurality of panels are applied. can be clearly distinguished/classified.
  • the fourth embodiment relates to problem 2 above and describes a DCI field (SRI field/TPMI field) for dynamic indication of panel switching.
  • UL transmissions using X panels/TRPs may be indicated by (the SRI field/TPMI field contained in) a DCI that schedules the UL transmission.
  • Specific cases that can be supported include the following cases 1 to 3.
  • each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
  • Case 2 When UL transmission by Y panels/TRPs (1 ⁇ Y ⁇ X: X is greater than 2) is indicated, it can be further classified into the following options 1 to 3.
  • the DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, and Y (e.g., the first Y) SSRI/TPMI fields may be applied among the X SRI/TPMI fields. In this case, each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource. The remaining fields may be reserved.
  • the DCI may have Y SRI/TPMI fields, which may be selected from among X SRI/TPMI fields, where each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
  • the DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, for example. Some of the X SRI/TPMI fields may be jointly interpreted/concatenated. Thus, the X fields may be reinterpreted as Y fields. Each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
  • the DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, for example. Of the X SRI/TPMI fields, one (e.g., the first one) SSRI/TPMI field may be applied. In this case, each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource. The remaining fields may be reserved.
  • the DCI may have one SRI/TPMI field, which may be arbitrarily selected from the X SRI/TPMI fields (e.g., may be the first field), and which may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
  • the DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, and all/some of the X SRI/TPMI fields may be jointly interpreted/concatenated. Thus, the X fields may be reinterpreted as one field.
  • the one field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
  • an SRI field/TPMI field may be associated with different parameters (panel-specific) by the dynamic instruction of the DCI.
  • an SRI field/TPMI field may be associated with different parameters (panel-specific) by the dynamic instruction of the DCI.
  • the size of an SRI field/TPMI field may be determined as the maximum size required for the different SRS resource set/SRS resource or the different parameters (panel-specific).
  • the panel-specific parameters can refer to at least one of the number of SRS ports, the number of SRS resources, the full power mode, and the codebook subset.
  • the size of the fields may be determined based on the maximum size in the different cases.
  • the size of the DCI may be adjusted (aligned) by padding (adding) zeros to the DCI.
  • the UE can use DCI to realize panel switching according to multiple cases in which multiple panels are applied.
  • the fifth embodiment relates to problem 3 above and describes dynamic panel switching in multi-DCI based UL transmission.
  • STxMP is exemplified as UL transmission, but this is not limited thereto, and it is also possible to apply it to other UL transmissions.
  • the UE may be dynamically instructed to perform single-panel UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH transmission) using any one of M panels (M is 2 or more). Note that the number of panels that can be selected from the M panels is not limited to one, and may be several.
  • FIG. 24A-FIG. 24B are diagrams showing UL transmission scheme patterns for each CORESETPoolIndex in the fifth embodiment.
  • UL transmissions scheduled by DCI associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0 may support dynamic switching between single panel transmissions using panels #1/#2.
  • UL transmissions scheduled by DCI associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1 may support dynamic switching between single panel transmissions using panels #1/#2.
  • Embodiment 5-1 relates to a case in which two CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured in multi-DCI-based STxMP.
  • the first SRS resource set may be associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0, and the second SRS resource set may be associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1. That is, this association may be the same as the fixed association described above.
  • a single SRS resource set can apply different parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) to different panels based on dynamic instructions from the network (NW).
  • parameters e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.
  • one SRS resource set may be semi-statically configured with a set of multiple parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) for multiple panels.
  • the NW may dynamically instruct/update the association between the SRS resource set and the panel.
  • the UE may apply the updated set of parameters to one SRS resource set based on the instruction.
  • the parameters of one SRS resource may be dynamically instructed/updated by the NW.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 5-1.
  • the number of SRS ports of each of the two panels is 2 and 4.
  • the UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.
  • TRP #0 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex #0 (SRS resource set #0)
  • TRP #1 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex #1 (SRS resource set #1).
  • SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters.
  • SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.
  • SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with 4-port SRS resources (4 SRS ports) as parameters.
  • SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.
  • the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching between panels #0 and #1) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #0 from 2 to 4, and update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #1 from 4 to 2.
  • the UE may also apply the updated SRS resource set #0 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #0 and the panel from panel #0 to panel #1. Similarly, the UE may apply the updated SRS resource set #1 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #1 and the panel from panel #1 to panel #0.
  • the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #0 and from panel #0 to TRP #1.
  • Embodiment 5-2 relates to a case in which M (M is 2 or more) CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured in multi-DCI-based STxMP.
  • an SRS resource set indicator field (which may be another field/new field) may be used to indicate dynamic switching between multiple panels.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate a PUSCH transmission associated with one SRS resource set selected from the M SRS resource sets.
  • the one SRS resource set selected may be any one SRS resource set among the M SRS resource sets. Also, the selected SRS resource set is not limited to one, and may be several SRS resource sets.
  • 26A-26B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 5-2.
  • the correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 26A-26B may be changed (rearranged).
  • the 1st/2nd/3rd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource set.
  • the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 26A-26B may not all be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.
  • FIG. 26A shows an example in which one of two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • code points 0-1 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource set.
  • FIG. 26B shows an example in which one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission.
  • code points 0 to 2 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second/third SRS resource set.
  • the remaining code point 3 may be reserved.
  • the embodiment 5-3 relates to panel switching using MAC CE in multi-DCI-based STxMP.
  • the panel will be switched as the UE rotates.
  • the speed of panel switching can be an issue.
  • the base station gNB
  • the base station may be able to recognize the UE rotation based on the beam report regarding L1-RSRP/SINR.
  • the base station requires a certain amount of time (e.g., several milliseconds) to recognize the UE rotation.
  • M is 2 or more CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured.
  • the association between the SRS resource set and the CORESETPoolIndex may be indicated by the MAC CE.
  • the MAC CE may include a field indicating a CORESETPoolIndex and an SRS resource set indicator field associated with the CORESETPoolIndex.
  • the MAC CE may also include a field indicating multiple CORESETPoolIndexes and multiple SRS resource set indicator fields associated with each of the multiple CORESETPoolIndexes.
  • the MAC CE may not include a CORESETPoolIndex.
  • the MAC CE may include multiple SRS resource set indicator fields associated with the CORESETPoolIndex.
  • Each SRS resource set indicated by the MAC CE may be associated with one CORESETPoolIndex.
  • the first field of the SRS resource set indicator may correspond to CORESETPoolIndex#0, and the second field may correspond to CORESETPoolIndex#1.
  • the value (#0/#1) of CORESETPoolIndex may be updated for each SRS resource set by the MAC CE.
  • the value (#0/#1) of CORESETPoolIndex may be set for each SRS resource set by the RRC first, and a specific CORESETPoolIndex may be activated/deactivated for each SRS resource set by the MAC CE.
  • the MAC CE can be used to flexibly switch the corresponding CORESETPoolIndex for each SRS resource set.
  • the UE can realize dynamic panel switching in multi-DCI-based UL transmission by using DCI/MAC CE.
  • the sixth embodiment describes a method for supporting two or more panels in multi-DCI-based UL transmission, in relation to the above-mentioned problem 4.
  • STxMP is exemplified as UL transmission, but the present invention is not limited thereto and can be applied to other UL transmissions.
  • multi-DCI based UL transmission to support two or more panels, at least one of the following options 1-2 may be applied.
  • CORESETPoolIndex may be configured. Each CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with one SRS resource set. A PUSCH scheduled by a DCI associated with a certain CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with one SRS resource set and one panel.
  • An SRS resource set of X CBs/NCBs may be set.
  • the association between CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set may be set statically or semi-statically. For example, dynamic panel switching may be supported by applying the above-mentioned embodiment 5-1.
  • association between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource sets may be based on the order of CORESETPoolIndex and the order of SRS resource set indicators.
  • SRS resource sets of CB/NCB may be configured.
  • the associated SRS resource set may be dynamically indicated by the SRS resource set indicator field (including the DCI/MAC CE) in the same manner as in embodiment 5-2/5-3 in order to support dynamic panel switching.
  • Each CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with multiple SRS resource sets.
  • a PUSCH scheduled by a DCI associated with a certain CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with multiple SRS resource sets and multiple panels.
  • CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured.
  • the association between CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set may be set statically or semi-statically. For example, dynamic panel switching may be supported by applying the above-mentioned embodiment 5-1.
  • whether CORESETPoolIndex is associated with one/multiple SRS resource sets may be set by, for example, upper layer signaling.
  • association between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource sets may be based on the order of CORESETPoolIndex and the order of SRS resource set indicators.
  • SRS resource sets of CB/NCB may be configured.
  • one/more associated SRS resource sets may be dynamically indicated by (DCI/MAC CE including) the SRS resource set indicator field, as in the case of embodiment 5-2/5-3.
  • multiple SRS resource sets may be indicated/associated with one CORESETPoolIndex.
  • Whether a CORESETPoolIndex is associated with one/multiple SRS resource sets may be semi-statically configured, for example, by higher layer signaling.
  • Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment, which corresponds to the above-mentioned option 1 and shows an example in which a UE uses three panels for UL transmission to three TRPs.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels is 2, 2, and 4.
  • Panels #0 to #2 are associated with SRS resource sets #0 to #2, respectively.
  • TRP#0 to #2 are associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0/#1/#2 respectively.
  • the UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 corresponds to the above-mentioned option 2, and shows an example in which a UE uses three panels to transmit UL to three TRPs.
  • the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels is 2, 2, and 4.
  • Panels #0 to #2 are associated with SRS resource sets #0 to #2, respectively.
  • TRP#0 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0.
  • TRP#1/#2 are both associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1.
  • the UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.
  • two or more panels can be supported in multi-DCI-based UL transmission.
  • any information may be notified to the UE (from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS))) (in other words, any information is received from the BS by the UE) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
  • NW network
  • BS base station
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including in the MAC subheader a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) that is not specified in existing standards.
  • LCID Logical Channel ID
  • the notification When the notification is made by a DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • notification of any information to the UE in the above-mentioned embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • notification of any information from the UE (to the NW) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
  • physical layer signaling e.g., UCI
  • higher layer signaling e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE
  • a specific signal/channel e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
  • the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • notification of any information from the UE may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • At least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when a certain condition is satisfied, which may be specified in a standard or may be notified to the UE/BS using higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
  • At least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied only to UEs that have reported or support a particular UE capability.
  • the specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following: - Supporting specific processing/operations/control/information for at least one of the above embodiments.
  • Support STxMP (operations/schemes).
  • the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities per frequency (e.g., one or a combination of a cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities per frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities per subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities per Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC).
  • FR1 Frequency Range 1
  • FR2 FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2
  • SCS subcarrier Spacing
  • FS Feature Set
  • FSPC Feature Set Per Component-carrier
  • the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when the UE configures/activates/triggers specific information related to the above-mentioned embodiments (or performs the operations of the above-mentioned embodiments) by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
  • the specific information may be information indicating the activation of a specific STxMP scheme, any RRC parameters for a specific release (e.g., Rel. 18/19), etc.
  • the UE may, for example, apply Rel. 15/16 operations.
  • [Appendix 1] a receiver for receiving an instruction to switch to an uplink (UL) transmission utilizing a plurality of panels; a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of the switching, The panels before and after the switch form an asymmetric panel on the terminal.
  • [Appendix 2] The terminal of claim 1, wherein the multiple panels constituting the asymmetric panel have different capabilities for at least one of a maximum number of measurement reference signal (SRS) ports, a maximum number of SRS resources, a maximum rank, a full power mode, a codebook subset, and a coherent type.
  • SRS measurement reference signal
  • the terminal of claim 1 wherein the UL transmission is either a UL repeated transmission using a single DCI-based time division multiplexing (TDM) and a simultaneous UL transmission using a single DCI-based space division multiplexing (SDM) or a single frequency network (SFN).
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • SDM space division multiplexing
  • SFN single frequency network
  • TRP transmission/reception point
  • the switching instruction includes information regarding a particular panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the particular panel;
  • the terminal according to claim 1 or 2 wherein the control unit switches an SRS resource set corresponding to a panel before switching to an SRS resource set associated with a panel to be switched to, based on the information.
  • the information includes a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set indicator field associated with a particular panel; 4. The terminal of claim 1, wherein the SRS resource set indicator field indicates a particular UL transmission associated with an SRS resource set.
  • SRS measurement reference signal
  • Wired communication system A configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below.
  • communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination of these methods.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that realizes communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • 5G NR 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio
  • the wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)).
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • RATs Radio Access Technologies
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
  • NE-DC NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity
  • the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN).
  • the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
  • the wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (e.g., dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • gNBs NR base stations
  • N-DC Dual Connectivity
  • the wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with a relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are arranged within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is narrower than the macrocell C1.
  • a user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The arrangement and number of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the embodiment shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between the base stations 11 and 12, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
  • the user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10.
  • the user terminal 20 may utilize at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • CC component carriers
  • DC dual connectivity
  • Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)).
  • Macro cell C1 may be included in FR1
  • small cell C2 may be included in FR2.
  • FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz)
  • FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
  • the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) in each CC.
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • the multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication).
  • wire e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.
  • NR communication e.g., NR communication
  • base station 11 which corresponds to the upper station
  • IAB Integrated Access Backhaul
  • base station 12 which corresponds to a relay station
  • the base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 via another base station 10 or directly.
  • the core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5GCN 5G Core Network
  • NGC Next Generation Core
  • the core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM).
  • NF Network Functions
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • AMF Access and Mobility management Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • DN Data Network
  • LMF Location Management Function
  • OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
  • the user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
  • a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing may be used.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix OFDM
  • DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • the radio access method may also be called a waveform.
  • other radio access methods e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods
  • a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), etc. may be used as the downlink channel.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PDSCH User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PUSCH User data, upper layer control information, etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • Lower layer control information may be transmitted by the PDCCH.
  • the lower layer control information may include, for example, downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and the PUSCH.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH may be called a DL assignment or DL DCI
  • the DCI for scheduling the PUSCH may be called a UL grant or UL DCI.
  • the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data
  • the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
  • a control resource set (COntrol REsource SET (CORESET)) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH.
  • the CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI.
  • the search space corresponds to the search region and search method of PDCCH candidates.
  • One CORESET may be associated with one or multiple search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a search space based on the search space configuration.
  • a search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels.
  • One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that the terms “search space,” “search space set,” “search space setting,” “search space set setting,” “CORESET,” “CORESET setting,” etc. in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
  • the PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and a scheduling request (SR).
  • UCI uplink control information
  • CSI channel state information
  • HARQ-ACK Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement
  • ACK/NACK ACK/NACK
  • SR scheduling request
  • the PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
  • downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding "link.”
  • various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical” to the beginning.
  • a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • the synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS).
  • a signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for PBCH) may be called an SS/PBCH block, an SS Block (SSB), etc.
  • the SS, SSB, etc. may also be called a reference signal.
  • a measurement reference signal Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)
  • a demodulation reference signal DMRS
  • UL-RS uplink reference signal
  • DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
  • the base station 30 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • the base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140 may be provided.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the base station 10 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10.
  • the control unit 110 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc.
  • the control unit 110 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurement, etc.
  • the control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120.
  • the control unit 110 may perform call processing of communication channels (setting, release, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
  • the transceiver 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver, or may be composed of a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122.
  • the receiver may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the transmitting/receiving antenna 130 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 120 may receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver 120 may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data and control information obtained from the control unit 110 to generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • HARQ retransmission control HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver 120 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • channel coding which may include error correction coding
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver 120 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the transceiver 120 may perform measurements on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
  • the transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • devices included in the core network 30 e.g., network nodes providing NF
  • other base stations 10, etc. may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • the transmitting section and receiving section of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured with at least one of the transmitting/receiving section 120, the transmitting/receiving antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
  • the transceiver 120 may transmit a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission from a terminal using multiple panels.
  • the transceiver 120 may transmit a switching instruction for multiple downlink control information (multiple DCI)-based uplink (UL) transmission in which a terminal uses multiple panels.
  • the transceiver 120 may receive uplink transmission from the terminal using the panel switched based on the switching instruction.
  • the control unit 110 may determine panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction.
  • the user terminal 31 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • the user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transmitting/receiving unit 220, and a transmitting/receiving antenna 230. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transmitting/receiving unit 220, and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230 may be provided.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20.
  • the control unit 210 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc.
  • the control unit 210 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 220 and the transceiver antenna 230, measurement, etc.
  • the control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 220.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.
  • the transceiver 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver, or may be composed of a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222.
  • the receiver may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the transmitting/receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 220 may transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver 220 may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on the data and control information acquired from the controller 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • RLC layer processing e.g., RLC retransmission control
  • MAC layer processing e.g., HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver 220 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings of transform precoding.
  • the transceiver unit 220 transmission processing unit 2211
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing in order to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform, and when transform precoding is not enabled, it is not necessary to perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver 220 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • the transceiver 220 may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
  • the measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources.
  • the channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources.
  • the measurement unit 223 may derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources.
  • the interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc.
  • CSI-IM may be called CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS.
  • CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be read as interchangeable.
  • the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 220 and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive an instruction to switch to uplink (UL) transmission using multiple panels.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive an instruction to switch to uplink (UL) transmission based on multiple downlink control information (multiple DCI) using multiple panels.
  • the transceiver 220 may receive the instruction to switch the UL transmission using downlink control information (DCI) or a MAC control element.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the panels before and after the switching may form an asymmetric panel.
  • the multiple panels forming the asymmetric panel may have different capabilities for at least one of the maximum number of measurement reference signal (SRS) ports, the maximum number of SRS resources, the maximum rank, the full power mode, the codebook subset, and the coherent type.
  • the UL transmission may be either UL repeated transmission using single downlink control information (single DCI) based time division multiplexing (TDM), or simultaneous UL transmission using single downlink control information (single DCI) based space division multiplexing (SDM) or single frequency network (SFN).
  • the switching instruction may include information on a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.
  • the DCI may include an SRS resource indicator field according to the maximum number of panels supported, or a transmit precoding matrix index (TPMI) field.
  • the switching instruction may include information on a specific panel and a transmit/receive point (TRP) associated with the specific panel.
  • the switching indication may include information regarding a particular panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the particular panel.
  • the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate a particular UL transmission associated with an SRS resource set.
  • the control unit 210 may control the panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction.
  • the control unit 210 may update a specific parameter corresponding to the SRS resource set before the switching based on the information.
  • the control unit 210 may switch the SRS resource set corresponding to the panel before the switching to the SRS resource set associated with the panel to which the switching is to be performed based on the information.
  • each functional block may be realized using one device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more devices that are physically or logically separated and directly or indirectly connected (for example, using wires, wirelessly, etc.).
  • the functional blocks may be realized by combining the one device or the multiple devices with software.
  • the functions include, but are not limited to, judgement, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, selection, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment.
  • a functional block (component) that performs the transmission function may be called a transmitting unit, a transmitter, and the like. In either case, as mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on the method of realization.
  • a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, a memory 1002, a storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
  • the hardware configurations of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
  • processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
  • the functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of the reading and writing of data in the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
  • the processor 1001 operates an operating system to control the entire computer.
  • the processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) including an interface with peripheral devices, a control device, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • control unit 110 210
  • transmission/reception unit 120 220
  • etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
  • the processor 1001 also reads out programs (program codes), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes according to these.
  • the programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above embodiments.
  • the control unit 110 (210) may be realized by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be made for other functional blocks.
  • Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of, for example, Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), and other suitable storage media. Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
  • EEPROM Electrically EPROM
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc.
  • Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disk (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disk, a Blu-ray disk), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium.
  • Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
  • the communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also called, for example, a network device, a network controller, a network card, a communication module, etc.
  • the communication device 1004 may be configured to include a high-frequency switch, a duplexer, a filter, a frequency synthesizer, etc. to realize at least one of, for example, Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD).
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the above-mentioned transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220), transmitting/receiving antenna 130 (230), etc. may be realized by the communication device 1004.
  • the transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitting unit 120a (220a) and a receiving unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
  • the input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside.
  • the output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, a speaker, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that performs output to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one structure (e.g., a touch panel).
  • each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002 is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information.
  • the bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
  • the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using the hardware.
  • the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
  • a channel, a symbol, and a signal may be read as mutually interchangeable.
  • a signal may also be a message.
  • a reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may be called a pilot, a pilot signal, or the like depending on the applied standard.
  • a component carrier may also be called a cell, a frequency carrier, a carrier frequency, or the like.
  • a radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain.
  • Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe.
  • a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain.
  • a subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
  • the numerology may be a communication parameter that is applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel.
  • the numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: SubCarrier Spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, Transmission Time Interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame configuration, a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain, a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain, etc.
  • SCS SubCarrier Spacing
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • radio frame configuration a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain
  • a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain etc.
  • a slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols, etc.).
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • a slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
  • a slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or multiple symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
  • a radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units when transmitting a signal.
  • a different name may be used for radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol. Note that the time units such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.
  • one subframe may be called a TTI
  • multiple consecutive subframes may be called a TTI
  • one slot or one minislot may be called a TTI.
  • at least one of the subframe and the TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) in existing LTE, a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or a period longer than 1 ms.
  • the unit representing the TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc., instead of a subframe.
  • TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication.
  • a base station schedules each user terminal by allocating radio resources (such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) in TTI units.
  • radio resources such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal
  • the TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-coded data packet (transport block), a code block, a code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc.
  • the time interval e.g., the number of symbols
  • the time interval in which a transport block, a code block, a code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
  • one or more TTIs may be the minimum time unit of scheduling.
  • the number of slots (minislots) that constitute the minimum time unit of scheduling may be controlled.
  • a TTI having a time length of 1 ms may be called a normal TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, normal subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc.
  • a TTI shorter than a normal TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial or fractional TTI, shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
  • a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, a subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms
  • a short TTI e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.
  • TTI length shorter than the TTI length of a long TTI and equal to or greater than 1 ms.
  • a resource block is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be determined based on numerology.
  • an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length.
  • One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
  • one or more RBs may be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
  • PRB physical resource block
  • SCG sub-carrier group
  • REG resource element group
  • PRB pair an RB pair, etc.
  • a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs).
  • REs resource elements
  • one RE may be a radio resource area of one subcarrier and one symbol.
  • a Bandwidth Part which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth, may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier, where the common RBs may be identified by an index of the RB relative to a common reference point of the carrier.
  • PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within the BWP.
  • the BWP may include a UL BWP (BWP for UL) and a DL BWP (BWP for DL).
  • BWP UL BWP
  • BWP for DL DL BWP
  • One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
  • At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP.
  • BWP bitmap
  • radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols are merely examples.
  • the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, the symbol length, and the cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
  • the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using absolute values, may be represented using relative values from a predetermined value, or may be represented using other corresponding information.
  • a radio resource may be indicated by a predetermined index.
  • the names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any respect. Furthermore, the formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure.
  • the various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any respect.
  • the information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies.
  • the data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
  • information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer.
  • Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
  • Input/output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (e.g., memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.
  • a specific location e.g., memory
  • Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to.
  • Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted.
  • Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.
  • the notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods.
  • the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed by physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI)), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • the physical layer signaling may be called Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc.
  • the RRC signaling may be called an RRC message, for example, an RRC Connection Setup message, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, etc.
  • the MAC signaling may be notified, for example, using a MAC Control Element (CE).
  • CE MAC Control Element
  • notification of specified information is not limited to explicit notification, but may be implicit (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
  • the determination may be based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented by true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (e.g., with a predetermined value).
  • Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
  • Software, instructions, information, etc. may also be transmitted and received via a transmission medium.
  • a transmission medium For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using at least one of wired technologies (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)), and/or wireless technologies (such as infrared, microwave, etc.), then at least one of these wired and wireless technologies is included within the definition of a transmission medium.
  • wired technologies such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
  • wireless technologies such as infrared, microwave, etc.
  • Network may refer to the devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
  • the antenna port may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port).
  • the resource may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.).
  • the resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources.
  • the spatial domain transmission filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.
  • the above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.
  • CDM Code Division Multiplexing
  • RS Reference Signal
  • CORESET Control Resource Set
  • beam SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.
  • TCI state downlink TCI state
  • DL TCI state downlink TCI state
  • UL TCI state uplink TCI state
  • unified TCI state common TCI state
  • joint TCI state etc.
  • QCL QCL
  • QCL assumptions QCL relationship
  • QCL type information QCL property/properties
  • specific QCL type e.g., Type A, Type D
  • specific QCL type e.g., Type A, Type D
  • index identifier
  • indicator indication, resource ID, etc.
  • sequence list, set, group, cluster, subset, etc.
  • TCI state ID the spatial relationship information identifier
  • TCI state ID the spatial relationship information
  • TCI state the spatial relationship information
  • TCI state the spatial relationship information
  • TCI state the spatial relationship information
  • Base Station may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, picocell, etc.
  • a base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells.
  • a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also provide communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small base station for indoor use (Remote Radio Head (RRH))).
  • RRH Remote Radio Head
  • the term "cell” or “sector” refers to a part or the entire coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services in this coverage.
  • a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on the information.
  • MS Mobile Station
  • UE User Equipment
  • a mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
  • At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be called a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
  • the moving body in question refers to an object that can move, and the moving speed is arbitrary, and of course includes the case where the moving body is stationary.
  • the moving body in question includes, but is not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, artificial satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these.
  • the moving body in question may also be a moving body that moves autonomously based on an operating command.
  • the moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned).
  • a vehicle e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.
  • an unmanned moving object e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.
  • a robot manned or unmanned
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
  • the vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
  • various sensors including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58
  • an information service unit 59 including a communication module 60.
  • the drive unit 41 is composed of at least one of an engine, a motor, and a hybrid of an engine and a motor, for example.
  • the steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handlebar), and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
  • the electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an Input/Output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle.
  • the electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
  • ECU Electronic Control Unit
  • Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal acquired by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal acquired by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal of the accelerator pedal 43 acquired by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal of the brake pedal 44 acquired by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal of the shift lever 45 acquired by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. acquired by an object detection sensor 58.
  • the information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, for providing (outputting) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, and one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the information service unit 59 uses information acquired from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
  • various information/services e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services
  • the information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.) that perform output to the outside.
  • input devices e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.
  • output devices e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions for preventing accidents and reducing the driver's driving load, such as a millimeter wave radar, a Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), a camera, a positioning locator (e.g., a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., a High Definition (HD) map, an Autonomous Vehicle (AV) map, etc.), a gyro system (e.g., an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), an Inertial Navigation System (INS), etc.), an Artificial Intelligence (AI) chip, and an AI processor, and one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize a driving assistance function or an autonomous driving function.
  • the communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63.
  • the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58 that are provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with an external device. For example, it transmits and receives various information to and from the external device via wireless communication.
  • the communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49.
  • the external device may be, for example, the above-mentioned base station 10 or user terminal 20.
  • the communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 (it may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
  • the communication module 60 may transmit at least one of the signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49, information obtained based on the signals, and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59 to an external device via wireless communication.
  • the electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may be referred to as input units that accept input.
  • the PUSCH transmitted by the communication module 60 may include information based on the above input.
  • the communication module 60 receives various information (traffic information, signal information, vehicle distance information, etc.) transmitted from an external device and displays it on an information service unit 59 provided in the vehicle.
  • the information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH) received by the communication module 60).
  • the communication module 60 also stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and the like provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal.
  • each aspect/embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D), Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X), etc.).
  • the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions of the base station 10 described above.
  • terms such as "uplink” and "downlink” may be read as terms corresponding to terminal-to-terminal communication (for example, "sidelink").
  • the uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be read as the sidelink channel.
  • the user terminal in this disclosure may be interpreted as a base station.
  • the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions of the user terminal 20 described above.
  • operations that are described as being performed by a base station may in some cases be performed by its upper node.
  • a network that includes one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination of these.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving-Gateway
  • each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation.
  • the processing procedures, sequences, flow charts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as there is no inconsistency.
  • the methods described in this disclosure present elements of various steps in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the particular order presented.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A LTE-Advanced
  • LTE-B LTE-Beyond
  • SUPER 3G IMT-Advanced
  • 4th generation mobile communication system 4th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • xG x is, for example, an integer or decimal
  • Future Radio Access FX
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access
  • UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
  • IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi
  • IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (registered trademark)
  • IEEE 802.20 Ultra-Wide Band (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), and other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are expanded, modified, created
  • the phrase “based on” does not mean “based only on,” unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase “based on” means both “based only on” and “based at least on.”
  • any reference to an element using a designation such as "first,” “second,” etc., used in this disclosure does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must precede the second element in some way.
  • determining may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, “determining” may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., looking in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
  • Determining may also be considered to mean “determining” receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in a memory), etc.
  • judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc.
  • judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” some kind of action.
  • judgment (decision) may be read as interchangeably with the actions described above.
  • expect may be read as “be expected”.
  • "expect(s) " ("" may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to infinitive, etc.) may be read as “be expected !.
  • "does not expect " may be read as "be not expected ".
  • "An apparatus A is not expected " may be read as "An apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect " (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).
  • the "maximum transmit power" referred to in this disclosure may mean the maximum value of transmit power, may mean the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or may mean the rated UE maximum transmit power.
  • connection refers to any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are “connected” or “coupled” to each other.
  • the coupling or connection between the elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, “connected” may be read as "access.”
  • a and B are different may mean “A and B are different from each other.”
  • the term may also mean “A and B are each different from C.”
  • Terms such as “separate” and “combined” may also be interpreted in the same way as “different.”
  • timing, time, duration, time instance, any time unit e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe
  • period occasion, resource, etc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure comprises: a reception unit that receives a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission that uses a plurality of panels; and a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission on the basis of the switching instruction. The switching instruction includes information related to a specific panel and to a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with said specific panel. This aspect of the present disclosure makes it possible to appropriately perform UL transmission in which a plurality of panels are used.

Description

端末、無線通信方法及び基地局Terminal, wireless communication method and base station

 本開示は、次世代移動通信システムにおける端末、無線通信方法及び基地局に関する。 This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.

 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System(UMTS)ネットワークにおいて、更なる高速データレート、低遅延などを目的としてLong Term Evolution(LTE)が仕様化された(非特許文献1)。また、LTE(Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP(登録商標)) Release(Rel.)8、9)の更なる大容量、高度化などを目的として、LTE-Advanced(3GPP Rel.10-14)が仕様化された。 Long Term Evolution (LTE) was specified for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with the aim of achieving higher data rates and lower latency (Non-Patent Document 1). In addition, LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified for the purpose of achieving higher capacity and greater sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8, 9).

 LTEの後継システム(例えば、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、5G+(plus)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、New Radio(NR)、3GPP Rel.15以降などともいう)も検討されている。 Successor systems to LTE (e.g., 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 5G+ (plus), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), New Radio (NR), 3GPP Rel. 15 and later, etc.) are also under consideration.

3GPP TS 36.300 V8.12.0 “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 8)”、2010年4月3GPP TS 36.300 V8.12.0 “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Univers al Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 8)”, April 2010

 将来の無線通信システムにおいて、UEは、複数パネル(又は、複数ビーム)の1つを上りリンク(UL)送信に用いることができる。また、Rel.18以降において、ULのスループット/信頼性の改善のために、1以上の送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))に向けて、複数パネルを利用した同時マルチパネル送信(Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels(STxMP))がサポートされることが検討されている。 In future wireless communication systems, a UE will be able to use one of multiple panels (or multiple beams) for uplink (UL) transmission. In addition, in Rel. 18 and later, support for simultaneous multi-panel transmission (Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels (STxMP)) using multiple panels toward one or more transmission/reception points (Transmission/Reception Points (TRPs)) is being considered for improving UL throughput/reliability.

 しかしながら、複数パネルを利用したUL送信(例えば、同時UL送信)において、パネル間の切り替えが必要となるケースが存在し得る。この場合のUE動作をどのように制御するかについては、十分に検討されていない。この検討が十分でない場合、複数パネルを利用したUL送信が適切に行われず、スループットの低下など、システム性能が低下するおそれがある。 However, in UL transmission using multiple panels (e.g., simultaneous UL transmission), there may be cases where switching between panels is necessary. How to control UE operation in such cases has not been fully considered. If this consideration is not sufficient, UL transmission using multiple panels may not be performed appropriately, which may result in reduced throughput and other degradation of system performance.

 そこで、本開示は、複数パネルを利用してUL送信を行う場合であっても、UL送信を適切に制御することができる端末、無線通信方法及び基地局を提供することを目的の1つとする。 Therefore, one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that can appropriately control UL transmission, even when UL transmission is performed using multiple panels.

 本開示の一態様に係る端末は、複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信する受信部と、前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御する制御部と、を有し、前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含む。 A terminal according to one embodiment of the present disclosure has a receiver that receives a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission using multiple panels, and a controller that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction, where the switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.

 本開示の一態様によれば、複数パネルを利用したUL送信を適切に行うことができる。 According to one aspect of the present disclosure, UL transmission can be performed appropriately using multiple panels.

図1は、プリコーダタイプとTPMIインデックスとの関連付けの一例を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of an association between a precoder type and a TPMI index. 図2A及び図2Bは、シングルパネルのUL送信の一例を示す図である。2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating an example of a single panel UL transmission. 図3A-図3Cは、マルチパネルを用いた同時UL送信の方式1~3の一例を示す図である。3A to 3C are diagrams showing examples of methods 1 to 3 of simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels. 図4A-図4Cは、PUSCHの送信方式の一例を示す図である。4A to 4C are diagrams showing an example of a PUSCH transmission method. 図5A-図5Cは、PUSCHの送信方式の他の例を示す図である。5A to 5C are diagrams showing other examples of the PUSCH transmission method. 図6は、マルチパネルを用いた同時UL送信の一例を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels. 図7は、PUSCH及びPUCCHの同時送信の一例を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous transmission of PUSCH and PUCCH. 図8は、Rel.17 NR以降におけるマルチグループベースビーム報告用のCSIレポートの一例を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a CSI report for multi-group based beam reporting in Rel. 17 NR and later. 図9A-図9Cは、シングルTRP シングルパネル送信の一例を示す図である。9A-9C show an example of a single TRP single panel transmission. 図10A-図10Cは、2つのパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信の一例を示す図である。Figures 10A-10C show an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using two panels. 図11は、3つ(全て)のパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信の一例を示す図である。FIG. 11 shows an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using all three panels. 図12は、TDMを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using TDM. 図13は、SDMを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SDM. 図14は、SFNを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SFN. 図15は、実施形態3-1に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 3-1. 図16は、実施形態3-2に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-2. 図17は、実施形態3-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2. 図18は、実施形態3-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2. 図19は、実施形態3-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2. 図20は、実施形態3-3に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 3-3. 図21は、実施形態3-3に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3. 図22は、実施形態3-3に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example pattern/combination of a PUSCH transmission scheme indicated by a specific code point in an SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3. 図23A-図23Bは、実施形態3-4に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド/SRSリソースインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。23A-23B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field/SRS resource indicator field according to embodiments 3-4. 図24A-図24Bは、第5の実施形態に係るCORESETPoolIndexごとのUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。24A and 24B are diagrams showing patterns of UL transmission schemes for each CORESETPoolIndex according to the fifth embodiment. 図25は、実施形態5-1に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to the embodiment 5-1. 図26A-図26Bは、実施形態5-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。26A-26B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in an SRS resource set indicator field relating to embodiment 5-2. 図27は、第6の実施形態に係る複数パネルをサポートするシナリオの一例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment. 図28は、第6の実施形態に係る複数パネルをサポートするシナリオの他の一例を示す図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment. 図29は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment. 図30は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. 図31は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図32は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図33は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.

(PUSCHプリコーダ)
 NRでは、UEがコードブック(Codebook(CB))ベース送信及びノンコードブック(Non-Codebook(NCB))ベース送信の少なくとも一方をサポートすることが検討されている。
(PUSCH precoder)
In NR, it is considered that a UE will support at least one of Codebook (CB)-based transmission and Non-Codebook (NCB)-based transmission.

 例えば、UEは少なくとも測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))リソースインジケータ(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))を用いて、CBベース及びNCBベースの少なくとも一方の上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))送信のためのプリコーダ(プリコーディング行列)を判断することが検討されている。 For example, it is being considered that the UE will use at least a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource indicator (SRI) for measurement to determine a precoder (precoding matrix) for CB-based and/or NCB-based Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmissions.

 UEは、CBベース送信の場合、SRI、送信ランク指標(Transmitted Rank Indicator(TRI))及び送信プリコーディング行列指標(Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator(TPMI))などに基づいて、PUSCH送信のためのプリコーダを決定してもよい。UEは、NCBベース送信の場合、SRIに基づいてPUSCH送信のためのプリコーダを決定してもよい。 In the case of CB-based transmission, the UE may determine a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, a transmitted rank indicator (Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI)), a transmitted precoding matrix indicator (Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI)), etc. In the case of NCB-based transmission, the UE may determine a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.

 SRI、TRI、TPMIなどは、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))を用いてUEに通知されてもよい。SRIは、DCIのSRS Resource Indicatorフィールド(SRIフィールド)によって指定されてもよいし、コンフィギュアドグラントPUSCH(configured grant PUSCH)のRRC情報要素「ConfiguredGrantConfig」に含まれるパラメータ「srs-ResourceIndicator」によって指定されてもよい。TRI及びTPMIは、DCIのプリコーディング情報及びレイヤ数フィールド(”Precoding information and number of layers” field)によって指定されてもよい。 The SRI, TRI, TPMI, etc. may be notified to the UE using Downlink Control Information (DCI). The SRI may be specified by the SRS Resource Indicator field (SRI field) of the DCI, or by the parameter "srs-ResourceIndicator" included in the RRC information element "ConfiguredGrantConfig" of the configured grant PUSCH. The TRI and TPMI may be specified by the "Precoding information and number of layers" field of the DCI.

 UEは、プリコーダタイプに関するUE能力情報(UE capability information)を報告し、基地局から上位レイヤシグナリングによって当該UE能力情報に基づくプリコーダタイプを設定されてもよい。当該UE能力情報は、UEがPUSCH送信において用いるプリコーダタイプの情報(RRCパラメータ「pusch-TransCoherence」で表されてもよい)であってもよい。 The UE may report UE capability information regarding the precoder type, and the base station may set the precoder type based on the UE capability information by higher layer signaling. The UE capability information may be information on the precoder type used by the UE in PUSCH transmission (which may be represented by the RRC parameter "pusch-TransCoherence").

 本開示において、上位レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報などのいずれか、又はこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, or any combination thereof.

 MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))、MAC Protocol Data Unit(PDU)などを用いてもよい。ブロードキャスト情報は、例えば、マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))などであってもよい。 The MAC signaling may be, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc. The broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), etc.

 UEは、上位レイヤシグナリングで通知されるPUSCH設定情報(RRCシグナリングの「PUSCH-Config」情報要素)に含まれるプリコーダタイプの情報(RRCパラメータ「codebookSubset」で表されてもよい)に基づいて、PUSCH送信に用いるプリコーダを決定してもよい。UEは、codebookSubsetによって、TPMIによって指定されるPMIのサブセットを設定されてもよい。 The UE may determine the precoder to be used for PUSCH transmission based on precoder type information (which may be represented by the RRC parameter "codebookSubset") included in the PUSCH configuration information (the "PUSCH-Config" information element of the RRC signaling) notified by higher layer signaling. The UE may set a subset of the PMI specified by the TPMI by the codebookSubset.

 なお、プリコーダタイプは、完全コヒーレント(full coherent、fully coherent、coherent)、部分コヒーレント(partial coherent)及びノンコヒーレント(non coherent、非コヒーレント)のいずれか又はこれらの少なくとも2つの組み合わせ(例えば、「完全及び部分及びノンコヒーレント(fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent)」、「部分及びノンコヒーレント(partialAndNonCoherent)」などのパラメータで表されてもよい)によって指定されてもよい。 The precoder type may be specified by any one of full coherent, partial coherent, and non-coherent, or a combination of at least two of these (e.g., may be expressed by parameters such as "fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent" and "partialAndNonCoherent").

 完全コヒーレントは、送信に用いる全アンテナポートの同期がとれている(位相を合わせることができる、適用するプリコーダが同じである、などと表現されてもよい)ことを意味してもよい。部分コヒーレントは、送信に用いるアンテナポートの一部のポート間は同期がとれているが、当該一部のポートと他のポートとは同期がとれないことを意味してもよい。ノンコヒーレントは、送信に用いる各アンテナポートの同期がとれないことを意味してもよい。 Fully coherent may mean that all antenna ports used for transmission are synchronized (may be expressed as being able to align the phase, using the same precoder, etc.). Partially coherent may mean that some of the antenna ports used for transmission are synchronized, but those some ports cannot be synchronized with other ports. Non-coherent may mean that the antenna ports used for transmission cannot be synchronized.

 なお、完全コヒーレントのプリコーダタイプをサポートするUEは、部分コヒーレント及びノンコヒーレントのプリコーダタイプをサポートすると想定されてもよい。部分コヒーレントのプリコーダタイプをサポートするUEは、ノンコヒーレントのプリコーダタイプをサポートすると想定されてもよい。 Note that a UE that supports a fully coherent precoder type may be assumed to support partially coherent and non-coherent precoder types. A UE that supports a partially coherent precoder type may be assumed to support a non-coherent precoder type.

 プリコーダタイプは、コヒーレンシー、PUSCH送信コヒーレンス、コヒーレントタイプ、コヒーレンスタイプ、コードブックタイプ、コードブックサブセット、コードブックサブセットタイプなどで読み替えられてもよい。 The precoder type may be interpreted as coherency, PUSCH transmission coherence, coherent type, coherence type, codebook type, codebook subset, codebook subset type, etc.

 UEは、CBベース送信のための複数のプリコーダ(プリコーディング行列、コードブックなどと呼ばれてもよい)から、UL送信をスケジュールするDCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット0_1。以下同様)から得られるTPMIインデックスに対応するプリコーディング行列を決定してもよい。 The UE may determine, from multiple precoders (which may also be called precoding matrices, codebooks, etc.) for CB-based transmission, a precoding matrix corresponding to a TPMI index obtained from a DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1, etc.) that schedules an UL transmission.

 図1は、プリコーダタイプとTPMIインデックスとの関連付けの一例を示す図である。図1は、DFT-s-OFDM(Discrete Fourier Transform spread OFDM、変換プリコーディング(transform precoding)が有効である)で4アンテナポートを用いたシングルレイヤ(ランク1)送信用のプリコーディング行列Wのテーブルに該当する。 Figure 1 shows an example of the association between precoder types and TPMI indexes. Figure 1 corresponds to a table of precoding matrix W for single-layer (rank 1) transmission using four antenna ports in DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform spread OFDM, where transform precoding is enabled).

 図1において、プリコーダタイプ(codebookSubset)が、完全及び部分及びノンコヒーレント(fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent)である場合、UEは、シングルレイヤ送信に対して、0から27までのいずれかのTPMIを通知される。また、プリコーダタイプが、部分及びノンコヒーレント(partialAndNonCoherent)である場合、UEは、シングルレイヤ送信に対して、0から11までのいずれかのTPMIを設定される。プリコーダタイプが、ノンコヒーレント(nonCoherent)である場合、UEは、シングルレイヤ送信に対して、0から3までのいずれかのTPMIを設定される。 In FIG. 1, if the precoder type (codebookSubset) is full, partial, and noncoherent (fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent), the UE is notified of a TPMI from 0 to 27 for single layer transmission. Also, if the precoder type is partial and noncoherent (partialAndNonCoherent), the UE is set with a TPMI from 0 to 11 for single layer transmission. If the precoder type is noncoherent (nonCoherent), the UE is set with a TPMI from 0 to 3 for single layer transmission.

 なお、図1に示すように、各列の成分がそれぞれ1つだけ0でないプリコーディング行列は、ノンコヒーレントコードブックと呼ばれてもよい。各列の成分がそれぞれ所定の数(全てではない)だけ0でないプリコーディング行列は、部分コヒーレントコードブックと呼ばれてもよい。各列の成分が全て0でないプリコーディング行列は、完全コヒーレントコードブックと呼ばれてもよい。 Note that, as shown in FIG. 1, a precoding matrix in which only one component in each column is not zero may be called a noncoherent codebook. A precoding matrix in which a predetermined number (not all) of components in each column are not zero may be called a partially coherent codebook. A precoding matrix in which all components in each column are not zero may be called a fully coherent codebook.

 ノンコヒーレントコードブック及び部分コヒーレントコードブックは、アンテナ選択プリコーダ(antenna selection precoder)と呼ばれてもよい。完全コヒーレントコードブックは、非アンテナ選択プリコーダ(non-antenna selection precoder)と呼ばれてもよい。 Noncoherent and partially coherent codebooks may be referred to as antenna selection precoders. Fully coherent codebooks may be referred to as non-antenna selection precoders.

 なお、本開示において、部分コヒーレントコードブックは、部分コヒーレントのコードブックサブセット(例えば、RRCパラメータ「codebookSubset」=「partialAndNonCoherent」)を設定されたUEが、コードブックベース送信のためにDCIによって指定されるTPMIに対応するコードブック(プリコーディング行列)のうち、ノンコヒーレントのコードブックサブセット(例えば、RRCパラメータ「codebookSubset」=「nonCoherent」)を設定されたUEが指定されるTPMIに対応するコードブックを除いたもの(つまり、4アンテナポートのシングルレイヤ送信であれば、TPMI=4から11のコードブック)に該当してもよい。 In the present disclosure, a partially coherent codebook may refer to a codebook (precoding matrix) corresponding to a TPMI specified by DCI for codebook-based transmission by a UE configured with a partially coherent codebook subset (e.g., RRC parameter "codebookSubset" = "partialAndNonCoherent"), excluding a codebook corresponding to a TPMI specified by DCI for a UE configured with a non-coherent codebook subset (e.g., RRC parameter "codebookSubset" = "nonCoherent") (i.e., in the case of single-layer transmission with four antenna ports, the codebook for TPMI = 4 to 11).

 なお、本開示において、完全コヒーレントコードブックは、完全コヒーレントのコードブックサブセット(例えば、RRCパラメータ「codebookSubset」=「fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent」)を設定されたUEが、コードブックベース送信のためにDCIによって指定されるTPMIに対応するコードブック(プリコーディング行列)のうち、部分コヒーレントのコードブックサブセット(例えば、RRCパラメータ「codebookSubset」=「partialAndNonCoherent」)を設定されたUEが指定されるTPMIに対応するコードブックを除いたもの(つまり、4アンテナポートのシングルレイヤ送信であれば、TPMI=12から27のコードブック)に該当してもよい。 In the present disclosure, a fully coherent codebook may refer to a codebook (precoding matrix) corresponding to a TPMI specified by DCI for codebook-based transmission by a UE configured with a fully coherent codebook subset (e.g., RRC parameter "codebookSubset" = "fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent"), excluding a codebook corresponding to a TPMI specified by DCI for a UE configured with a partially coherent codebook subset (e.g., RRC parameter "codebookSubset" = "partialAndNonCoherent") (i.e., in the case of single-layer transmission with four antenna ports, the codebook for TPMI = 12 to 27).

(SRS、PUSCHの送信の制御)
 Rel.15 NRにおいて、端末(ユーザ端末(user terminal)、User Equipment(UE))は、測定用参照信号(例えば、サウンディング参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS)))の送信に用いられる情報(SRS設定情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-Config」内のパラメータ)を受信してもよい。
(Control of SRS and PUSCH transmission)
In Rel. 15 NR, a terminal (user terminal, User Equipment (UE)) may receive information (SRS configuration information, for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config") used to transmit a measurement reference signal (for example, a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)).

 具体的には、UEは、1つ又は複数のSRSリソースセットに関する情報(SRSリソースセット情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-ResourceSet」)と、一つ又は複数のSRSリソースに関する情報(SRSリソース情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-Resource」)との少なくとも1つを受信してもよい。 Specifically, the UE may receive at least one of information regarding one or more SRS resource sets (SRS resource set information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet") and information regarding one or more SRS resources (SRS resource information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource").

 1つのSRSリソースセットは、所定数のSRSリソースに関連してもよい(所定数のSRSリソースをグループ化してもよい)。各SRSリソースは、SRSリソース識別子(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))又はSRSリソースID(Identifier)によって特定されてもよい。 An SRS resource set may relate to (group together) a number of SRS resources. Each SRS resource may be identified by an SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) or SRS Resource Identifier (ID).

 SRSリソースセット情報は、SRSリソースセットID(SRS-ResourceSetId)、当該リソースセットにおいて用いられるSRSリソースID(SRS-ResourceId)のリスト、SRSリソースタイプ、SRSの用途(usage)の情報を含んでもよい。 The SRS resource set information may include an SRS resource set ID (SRS-ResourceSetId), a list of SRS resource IDs (SRS-ResourceId) used in the resource set, an SRS resource type, and information on SRS usage.

 ここで、SRSリソースタイプは、周期的SRS(Periodic SRS(P-SRS))、セミパーシステントSRS(Semi-Persistent SRS(SP-SRS))、非周期的CSI(Aperiodic SRS(A-SRS))のいずれかを示してもよい。なお、UEは、P-SRS及びSP-SRSを周期的(又はアクティベート後、周期的)に送信し、A-SRSをDCIのSRSリクエストに基づいて送信してもよい。 Here, the SRS resource type may indicate any of periodic SRS (P-SRS), semi-persistent SRS (SP-SRS), and aperiodic CSI (A-SRS). Note that the UE may transmit P-SRS and SP-SRS periodically (or periodically after activation) and transmit A-SRS based on an SRS request in the DCI.

 また、用途(RRCパラメータの「usage」、L1(Layer-1)パラメータの「SRS-SetUse」)は、例えば、ビーム管理(beamManagement)、コードブック(codebook(CB))、ノンコードブック(noncodebook(NCB))、アンテナスイッチングなどであってもよい。コードブック又はノンコードブック用途のSRSは、SRIに基づくコードブックベース又はノンコードブックベースの上りリンク共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))送信のプリコーダの決定に用いられてもよい。 Furthermore, the usage (RRC parameter "usage", L1 (Layer-1) parameter "SRS-SetUse") may be, for example, beam management (beamManagement), codebook (CB), noncodebook (NCB), antenna switching, etc. The SRS for codebook or noncodebook usage may be used to determine a precoder for codebook-based or noncodebook-based uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) transmission based on the SRI.

 例えば、UEは、コードブックベース送信(codebook-based transmission)の場合、SRI、送信ランクインジケーター(Transmitted Rank Indicator(TRI))及び送信プリコーディング行列インジケーター(Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator(TPMI))に基づいて、PUSCH送信のためのプリコーダ(プリコーディング行列)を決定してもよい。UEは、ノンコードブックベース送信(non-codebook-based transmission)の場合、SRIに基づいてPUSCH送信のためのプリコーダを決定してもよい。 For example, in the case of codebook-based transmission, the UE may determine a precoder (precoding matrix) for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, a Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI), and a Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI). In the case of non-codebook-based transmission, the UE may determine a precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.

 SRSリソース情報は、SRSリソースID(SRS-ResourceId)、SRSポート数、SRSポート番号、送信Comb、SRSリソースマッピング(例えば、時間及び/又は周波数リソース位置、リソースオフセット、リソースの周期、繰り返し数、SRSシンボル数、SRS帯域幅など)、ホッピング関連情報、SRSリソースタイプ、系列ID、SRSの空間関係情報などを含んでもよい。 The SRS resource information may include an SRS resource ID (SRS-ResourceId), SRS port number, SRS port number, transmit comb, SRS resource mapping (e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.), hopping related information, SRS resource type, sequence ID, spatial relationship information of SRS, etc.

 SRSの空間関係情報(例えば、RRC情報要素の「spatialRelationInfo」)は、所定の参照信号とSRSとの間の空間関係情報を示してもよい。当該所定の参照信号は、同期信号/ブロードキャストチャネル(Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel(SS/PBCH))ブロック、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))及びSRS(例えば別のSRS)の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS/PBCHブロックは、同期信号ブロック(SSB)と呼ばれてもよい。 The spatial relationship information of the SRS (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") may indicate spatial relationship information between a specific reference signal and the SRS. The specific reference signal may be at least one of a Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel (SS/PBCH) block, a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS), and an SRS (e.g., another SRS). The SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB).

 SRSの空間関係情報は、上記所定の参照信号のインデックスとして、SSBインデックス、CSI-RSリソースID、SRSリソースIDの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The spatial relationship information of the SRS may include at least one of an SSB index, a CSI-RS resource ID, and an SRS resource ID as an index of the above-mentioned specified reference signal.

 なお、本開示において、SSBインデックス、SSBリソースID及びSSB Resource Indicator(SSBRI)は互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、CSI-RSインデックス、CSI-RSリソースID及びCSI-RS Resource Indicator(CRI)は互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、SRSインデックス、SRSリソースID及びSRIは互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In addition, in this disclosure, the SSB index, SSB resource ID, and SSB Resource Indicator (SSBRI) may be interchangeable. Also, the CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource ID, and CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI) may be interchangeable. Also, the SRS index, SRS resource ID, and SRI may be interchangeable.

 SRSの空間関係情報は、上記所定の参照信号に対応するサービングセルインデックス、BWPインデックス(BWP ID)などを含んでもよい。 The spatial relationship information of the SRS may include a serving cell index, a BWP index (BWP ID), etc., corresponding to the above-mentioned specified reference signal.

 UEは、あるSRSリソースについて、SSB又はCSI-RSと、SRSとに関する空間関係情報を設定される場合には、当該SSB又はCSI-RSの受信のための空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン受信フィルタ)と同じ空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)を用いて当該SRSリソースを送信してもよい。この場合、UEはSSB又はCSI-RSのUE受信ビームとSRSのUE送信ビームとが同じであると想定してもよい。 When spatial relationship information regarding an SSB or CSI-RS and an SRS is configured for a certain SRS resource, the UE may transmit the SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter for receiving the SSB or CSI-RS (spatial domain receive filter). In this case, the UE may assume that the UE receive beam for the SSB or CSI-RS and the UE transmit beam for the SRS are the same.

 UEは、あるSRS(ターゲットSRS)リソースについて、別のSRS(参照SRS)と当該SRS(ターゲットSRS)とに関する空間関係情報を設定される場合には、当該参照SRSの送信のための空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)と同じ空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)を用いてターゲットSRSリソースを送信してもよい。つまり、この場合、UEは参照SRSのUE送信ビームとターゲットSRSのUE送信ビームとが同じであると想定してもよい。 When spatial relationship information regarding a certain SRS (target SRS) resource is configured between another SRS (reference SRS) and the SRS (target SRS), the UE may transmit the target SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmission filter) as the spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmission filter) for transmitting the reference SRS. In other words, in this case, the UE may assume that the UE transmission beam of the reference SRS and the UE transmission beam of the target SRS are the same.

 UEは、DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット0_1)内の所定フィールド(例えば、SRSリソース識別子(SRI)フィールド)の値に基づいて、当該DCIによってスケジュールされるPUSCHの空間関係を決定してもよい。具体的には、UEは、当該所定フィールドの値(例えば、SRI)に基づいて決定されるSRSリソースの空間関係情報(例えば、RRC情報要素の「spatialRelationInfo」)をPUSCH送信に用いてもよい。 The UE may determine the spatial relationship of the PUSCH scheduled by the DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1) based on the value of a specific field (e.g., an SRS resource identifier (SRI) field) in the DCI. Specifically, the UE may use spatial relationship information of the SRS resource (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") determined based on the value of the specific field (e.g., SRI) for PUSCH transmission.

 Rel.15/16 NRでは、PUSCHに対し、コードブックベース送信を用いる場合、UEは、最大2個のSRSリソースを有する用途がコードブックのSRSリソースセットを、RRCによって設定され、当該最大2個のSRSリソースの1つをDCI(1ビットのSRIフィールド)によって指示されてもよい。PUSCHの送信ビームは、SRIフィールドによって指定されることになる。 In Rel. 15/16 NR, when using codebook-based transmission for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a codebook-use SRS resource set having up to two SRS resources, and one of the up to two SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (1-bit SRI field). The transmission beam for PUSCH is specified by the SRI field.

 UEは、プリコーディング情報及びレイヤ数フィールド(以下、プリコーディング情報フィールドとも呼ぶ)に基づいて、PUSCHのためのTPMI及びレイヤ数(送信ランク)を判断してもよい。UEは、上記SRIフィールドによって指定されたSRSリソースのために設定された上位レイヤパラメータの「nrofSRS-Ports」によって示されるSRSポート数と同じポート数についての上りリンク用のコードブックから、上記TPMI、レイヤ数などに基づいてプリコーダを選択してもよい。 The UE may determine the TPMI and number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the precoding information and number of layers field (hereinafter also referred to as the precoding information field). The UE may select a precoder based on the TPMI, number of layers, etc. from an uplink codebook for the same number of ports as the number of SRS ports indicated by the upper layer parameter "nrofSRS-Ports" set for the SRS resource specified by the SRI field.

 Rel.15/16 NRでは、PUSCHに対し、ノンコードブックベース送信を用いる場合、UEは、最大4個のSRSリソースを有する用途がノンコードブックのSRSリソースセットを、RRCによって設定され、当該最大4個のSRSリソースの1つ以上をDCI(2ビットのSRIフィールド)によって指示されてもよい。 In Rel. 15/16 NR, when non-codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a non-codebook-used SRS resource set having up to four SRS resources, and one or more of the up to four SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (2-bit SRI field).

 UEは、上記SRIフィールドに基づいて、PUSCHのためのレイヤ数(送信ランク)を決定してもよい。例えば、UEは、上記SRIフィールドによって指定されるSRSリソースの数が、PUSCHのためのレイヤ数と同じであると判断してもよい。また、UEは、上記SRSリソースのプリコーダを算出してもよい。 The UE may determine the number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the SRI field. For example, the UE may determine that the number of SRS resources specified by the SRI field is the same as the number of layers for the PUSCH. The UE may also calculate a precoder for the SRS resources.

 当該SRSリソース(又は当該SRSリソースが属するSRSリソースセット)に関連するCSI-RS(associated CSI-RSと呼ばれてもよい)が上位レイヤで設定されている場合、PUSCHの送信ビームは当該設定された関連するCSI-RS(の測定)に基づいて算出されてもよい。そうでない場合、PUSCHの送信ビームはSRIによって指定されてもよい。 If the CSI-RS (which may be called associated CSI-RS) associated with the SRS resource (or the SRS resource set to which the SRS resource belongs) is configured by a higher layer, the transmission beam of the PUSCH may be calculated based on (the measurement of) the configured associated CSI-RS. Otherwise, the transmission beam of the PUSCH may be specified by the SRI.

 なお、UEは、コードブックベースPUSCH送信を用いるかノンコードブックベースPUSCH送信を用いるかを、送信スキームを示す上位レイヤパラメータ「txConfig」によって設定されてもよい。当該パラメータは、「コードブック(codebook)」又は「ノンコードブック(nonCodebook)」の値を示してもよい。 The UE may be configured to use codebook-based PUSCH transmission or non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission by a higher layer parameter "txConfig" indicating a transmission scheme. The parameter may indicate a value of "codebook" or "nonCodebook."

 本開示において、コードブックベースPUSCH(コードブックベースPUSCH送信、コードブックベース送信)は、UEに送信スキームとして「コードブック」を設定された場合のPUSCHを意味してもよい。本開示において、ノンコードブックベースPUSCH(ノンコードブックベースPUSCH送信、ノンコードブックベース送信)は、UEに送信スキームとして「ノンコードブック」を設定された場合のPUSCHを意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, codebook-based PUSCH (codebook-based PUSCH transmission, codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme in the UE. In this disclosure, non-codebook-based PUSCH (non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission, non-codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "non-codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme in the UE.

 ところで、将来の無線通信システム(例えば、Rel.18 NR以降)では、1以上の送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))に向けて、複数のビーム/パネル/TRPを利用した同時UL送信(例えば、simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission(STxMP))がサポートされることが想定される。 Incidentally, future wireless communication systems (e.g., Rel. 18 NR and later) are expected to support simultaneous UL transmission (e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)) using multiple beams/panels/TRPs toward one or more transmission/reception points (TRPs).

 例えば、Rel.18では、最大2TRP/2パネルまでを利用した同時UL送信が検討されている。また、シングルDCIベースとマルチDCIベースのマルチTRP動作を考慮し、レイヤ総数は全パネルにわたって最大4レイヤ、コードワード総数は全パネルにわたって最大2つとすることも想定される。もちろん、TRP数、パネル数、レイヤ数、コードワード数はこれに限られない。 For example, Rel. 18 is considering simultaneous UL transmission using up to 2 TRPs/2 panels. Also, taking into account single DCI-based and multi-DCI-based multi-TRP operation, it is expected that the total number of layers will be up to 4 across all panels, and the total number of codewords will be up to 2 across all panels. Of course, the number of TRPs, panels, layers, and codewords are not limited to these.

(シングルパネル送信)
 シングルパネルUL送信方式又はシングルパネルUL送信方式候補は、以下の送信方式A,B(シングルパネルUL送信方式A,B)の少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。なお、本開示において、パネル/UEパネルは、UE能力毎に報告されるUE能力値セット(例えば、UE capability value set)と読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、異なるパネル、異なる空間関係、異なるジョイントTCI状態、異なるTPCパラメータ、異なるアンテナポートなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。
(Single Panel Transmission)
At least one of the following transmission schemes A and B (single panel UL transmission schemes A and B) may be applied to the single panel UL transmission scheme or the single panel UL transmission scheme candidate. In this disclosure, the panel/UE panel may be read as a UE capability value set (e.g., UE capability value set) reported for each UE capability. In this disclosure, different panels, different spatial relationships, different joint TCI states, different TPC parameters, different antenna ports, etc. may be read as mutually interchangeable terms.

<送信方式A:シングルパネル シングルTRP UL送信>
 Rel.15及びRel.16では、UEは、1つのみのビーム及びパネルから、1つの時点において、1つのTRPに対してULを送信する送信方式が使用される(図2A)。
<Transmission method A: Single panel, single TRP, UL transmission>
In Rel. 15 and Rel. 16, a transmission scheme is used in which a UE transmits UL for one TRP from only one beam and panel at one time (FIG. 2A).

<送信方式B:シングルパネル マルチTRP UL送信>
 Rel.17においては、1つの時点において、1つのみのビーム及びパネルからのUL送信を行い、複数のTRPに対する繰り返し送信を行うことが検討されている(図2B)。図2Bの例では、UEは、パネル#1からTRP#1にPUSCHを送信した後(ビーム及びパネルを切り替え)、パネル#2からTRP#2にPUSCHを送信する。2つのTRPは、理想バックホール(ideal backhaul)を介して接続される。
<Transmission method B: Single panel multi-TRP UL transmission>
In Rel. 17, UL transmission from only one beam and panel at one time and repeated transmission to multiple TRPs is considered (FIG. 2B). In the example of FIG. 2B, the UE transmits PUSCH from panel #1 to TRP #1 (switching beams and panels), and then transmits PUSCH from panel #2 to TRP #2. The two TRPs are connected via an ideal backhaul.

(マルチパネル送信)
 Rel.18以降において、ULのスループット/信頼性の改善のために、1以上のTRPに向けて、複数パネルを用いる同時UL送信(例えば、simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission(STxMP))がサポートされることが検討されている。また、所定のULチャネル(例えば、PUSCH/PUCCH)等について、マルチパネルUL送信方式が検討されている。
(Multi-panel transmission)
In Rel. 18 and later, in order to improve UL throughput/reliability, support for simultaneous UL transmission using multiple panels (e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)) for one or more TRPs is being considered. Also, a multi-panel UL transmission scheme is being considered for a specific UL channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH) etc.

 マルチパネルUL送信として、例えば、最大X個(例えば、X=2)と、最大Y個(例えば、Y=2)のパネルがサポートされてもよい。マルチパネルUL送信において、PUSCHに対するULプリコーディング指示がサポートされる場合、マルチパネル同時送信に対して既存システム(例えば、Rel.16以前)のコードブックがサポートされてもよい。シングルDCI及びマルチDCIベースのマルチTRPオペレーションを考慮した場合、レイヤ数は全パネルにおいて最大x個(例えば、x=4)、コードワード(CW)数は全パネルで最大y個(例えば、y=2)であってもよい。 For example, up to X panels (e.g., X=2) and up to Y panels (e.g., Y=2) may be supported for multi-panel UL transmission. In multi-panel UL transmission, if UL precoding instructions for PUSCH are supported, codebooks of existing systems (e.g., before Rel. 16) may be supported for simultaneous multi-panel transmission. Considering single DCI and multi-DCI based multi-TRP operation, the number of layers may be up to x (e.g., x=4) in all panels, and the number of codewords (CWs) may be up to y (e.g., y=2) in all panels.

 マルチパネルUL送信方式又はマルチパネルUL送信方式候補は、次の方式1から3(マルチパネルUL送信方式1から3)の少なくとも1つが検討されている。送信方式1から3の1つのみがサポートされてもよい。送信方式1から3の少なくとも1つを含む複数の方式がサポートされ、複数の送信方式の1つがUEに設定されてもよい。 At least one of the following methods 1 to 3 (multi-panel UL transmission methods 1 to 3) is being considered as a multi-panel UL transmission method or a candidate multi-panel UL transmission method. Only one of transmission methods 1 to 3 may be supported. Multiple methods including at least one of transmission methods 1 to 3 may be supported, and one of the multiple transmission methods may be configured in the UE.

<送信方式1:コヒーレントマルチパネルUL送信>
 複数パネルが互いに同期していてもよい。全てのレイヤは、全てのパネルにマップされる。複数アナログビームが指示される。SRSリソースインジケータ(SRI)フィールドが拡張されてもよい。この方式は、ULに対して最大4レイヤを用いてもよい。
<Transmission method 1: Coherent multi-panel UL transmission>
Multiple panels may be synchronized with each other. All layers are mapped to all panels. Multiple analog beams are directed. The SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) field may be extended. This scheme may use up to 4 layers for the UL.

 図3Aの例において、UEは、1コードワード(CW)又は1トランスポートブロック(TB)をL個のレイヤ(PUSCH(1,2,…,L))へマップし、2つのパネルのそれぞれからL個のレイヤを送信する。パネル#1及びパネル#2はコヒーレントである。送信方式1は、ダイバーシチによるゲインを得ることができる。2つのパネルにおけるレイヤの総数は2Lである。レイヤの総数の最大値が4である場合、1つのパネルにおけるレイヤ数の最大値は2である。 In the example of FIG. 3A, the UE maps one codeword (CW) or one transport block (TB) to L layers (PUSCH (1, 2, ..., L)) and transmits L layers from each of the two panels. Panel #1 and panel #2 are coherent. Transmission method 1 can obtain diversity gain. The total number of layers in the two panels is 2L. If the maximum total number of layers is 4, the maximum number of layers in one panel is 2.

<送信方式2:1つのコードワード(CW)又はトランスポートブロック(TB)のノンコヒーレントマルチパネルUL送信>
 複数パネルが同期していなくてもよい。異なるレイヤは、異なるパネルと、複数パネルからのPUSCHに対する1つのCW又はTBにマップされる。1つのCW又はTBに対応するレイヤが、複数パネルにマップされてもよい。この送信方式は、ULに対して最大4レイヤ又は最大8レイヤを用いてもよい。最大8レイヤをサポートする場合、この送信方式は、最大8レイヤを用いる1つのCW又はTBをサポートしてもよい。
<Transmission method 2: Non-coherent multi-panel UL transmission of one codeword (CW) or transport block (TB)>
Multiple panels may not be synchronized. Different layers are mapped to different panels and one CW or TB for PUSCH from multiple panels. A layer corresponding to one CW or TB may be mapped to multiple panels. The transmission scheme may use up to 4 layers or up to 8 layers for UL. If up to 8 layers are supported, the transmission scheme may support one CW or TB with up to 8 layers.

 図3Bの例において、UEは、1CW又は1TBを、k個のレイヤ(PUSCH(1,2,…,k))とL-k個のレイヤ(PUSCH(k+1,k+2,…,L))とへマップし、k個のレイヤをパネル#1から送信し、L-k個のレイヤをパネル#2から送信する。送信方式2は、多重及びダイバーシチによるゲインを得ることができる。2つのパネルにおけるレイヤの総数はLである。 In the example of FIG. 3B, the UE maps 1 CW or 1 TB to k layers (PUSCH(1, 2, ..., k)) and L-k layers (PUSCH(k+1, k+2, ..., L)), transmits k layers from panel #1, and transmits L-k layers from panel #2. Transmission method 2 can obtain gains through multiplexing and diversity. The total number of layers in the two panels is L.

<送信方式3:2つのCW又はTBのノンコヒーレントマルチパネルUL送信>
 複数パネルが同期していなくてもよい。異なるレイヤは、異なるパネルと、複数パネルからのPUSCHに対する2つのCW又はTBにマップされる。1つのCW又はTBに対応するレイヤが、1つのパネルにマップされてもよい。複数のCW又はTBに対応するレイヤが、異なるパネルにマップされてもよい。この送信方式は、ULに対して最大4レイヤ又は最大8レイヤを用いてもよい。最大8レイヤをサポートする場合、この送信方式は、CW又はTB当たり最大4レイヤをサポートしてもよい。
<Transmission method 3: Non-coherent multi-panel UL transmission of two CWs or TBs>
Multiple panels may not be synchronized. Different layers are mapped to different panels and two CWs or TBs for PUSCH from multiple panels. Layers corresponding to one CW or TB may be mapped to one panel. Layers corresponding to multiple CWs or TBs may be mapped to different panels. This transmission scheme may use up to 4 layers or up to 8 layers for UL. When supporting up to 8 layers, this transmission scheme may support up to 4 layers per CW or TB.

 図3Cの例において、UEは、2CW又は2TBのうち、CW#1又はTB#1をk個のレイヤ(PUSCH(1,2,…,k))へマップし、CW#2又はTB#2をL-k個のレイヤ(PUSCH(k+1,k+2,…,L))へマップし、k個のレイヤをパネル#1から送信し、L-k個のレイヤをパネル#2から送信する。送信方式3は、多重及びダイバーシチによるゲインを得ることができる。2つのパネルにおけるレイヤの総数はLである。 In the example of FIG. 3C, of the 2CWs or 2TBs, the UE maps CW#1 or TB#1 to k layers (PUSCH (1, 2, ..., k)), maps CW#2 or TB#2 to L-k layers (PUSCH (k+1, k+2, ..., L)), transmits k layers from panel #1, and transmits L-k layers from panel #2. Transmission method 3 can obtain gains through multiplexing and diversity. The total number of layers in the two panels is L.

 上記の各送信方式において、基地局は、UL TCI又はパネルIDを用いて、UL送信のためのパネル固有送信を設定又は指示してもよい。UL TCI(UL TCI状態)は、Rel.15においてサポートされるDLビーム指示と類似するシグナリングに基づいてもよい。パネルIDは、ターゲットRSリソース又はターゲットRSリソースセットと、PUCCHと、SRSと、PRACHと、の少なくとも1つの送信に、暗示的に又は明示的に適用されてもよい。パネルIDが明示的に通知される場合、パネルIDは、ターゲットRSと、ターゲットチャネルと、リファレンスRSと、の少なくとも1つ(例えば、DL RSリソース設定又は空間関係情報)において設定されてもよい。 In each of the above transmission methods, the base station may configure or indicate panel-specific transmission for UL transmission using UL TCI or panel ID. UL TCI (UL TCI state) may be based on signaling similar to DL beam indication supported in Rel. 15. Panel ID may be implicitly or explicitly applied to transmission of at least one of target RS resource or target RS resource set, PUCCH, SRS, and PRACH. If panel ID is explicitly signaled, panel ID may be configured in at least one of target RS, target channel, and reference RS (e.g., DL RS resource configuration or spatial relationship information).

(同時マルチパネル送信)
 上述した1以上の伝送方式/モードにおいて、1つのDCI(シングルDCI)に基づくPUSCHのスケジュール/複数のDCI(マルチDCI)に基づくPUSCHのスケジュールについてのマルチパネルUL送信(例えば、同時マルチパネル送信(Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels(STxMP)))が検討されている。
(Simultaneous multi-panel transmission)
In one or more of the transmission methods/modes described above, multi-panel UL transmission (e.g., Simultaneous Transmission across Multiple Panels (STxMP)) for a PUSCH schedule based on one DCI (single DCI)/a PUSCH schedule based on multiple DCIs (multi-DCI) is being considered.

<シングルDCIベースのSTxMP>
 シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおける同時マルチパネル送信(STxMP)において、UL送信(例えば、PUSCH)に対して以下の方式が適用されてもよい。
・空間分割多重(Space Division Multiplexing:SDM)方式:1つのPUSCHの異なるレイヤ/DMRSポートが別々にプリコーディングされ、異なるUEビーム/パネルから同時に送信される(図4A、図4B参照)。
・空間分割多重繰り返し(SDM repetition)方式:同じTBの異なる冗長バージョン(Redundancy Version(RV))を有する2つのPUSCH送信機会が、同じ時間および周波数リソース上で2つの異なるUEビーム/パネルから同時に送信される(図4C参照)。
・周波数分割多重(FDM)-A方式:1つのPUSCHの送信機会(例えば、one PUSCH transmission occasion)の周波数領域リソースの異なる部分が、異なるUEビーム/パネルから送信される(図5A参照)。
・FDM-B方式:同一TBの同一/異なるRVを有する2つのPUSCH送信機会が、重複しない周波数領域リソース及び同一時間領域リソース上で、異なるUEビーム/パネルから送信される(図5B参照)。
・SFNベースの送信方式:1つのPUSCHの全ての同じレイヤ/DMRSポートが2つの異なるUEビーム/パネルから同時に送信される(図5C参照)。
<Single DCI-based STxMP>
In simultaneous multi-panel transmission (STxMP) in a single DCI based multi-TRP system, the following scheme may be applied to UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH).
Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) method: Different layers/DMRS ports of one PUSCH are precoded separately and transmitted simultaneously from different UE beams/panels (see Figures 4A and 4B).
- Space Division Multiplexing (SDM repetition) scheme: Two PUSCH transmission opportunities with different redundancy versions (RVs) of the same TB are transmitted simultaneously from two different UE beams/panels on the same time and frequency resources (see Fig. 4C).
Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)-A scheme: Different portions of the frequency domain resources of one PUSCH transmission occasion (eg, one PUSCH transmission occasion) are transmitted from different UE beams/panels (see FIG. 5A).
FDM-B scheme: Two PUSCH transmission opportunities with the same/different RV for the same TB are transmitted from different UE beams/panels on non-overlapping frequency domain resources and the same time domain resources (see FIG. 5B).
SFN-based transmission scheme: all the same layers/DMRS ports of one PUSCH are transmitted simultaneously from two different UE beams/panels (see Fig. 5C).

 なお、本開示において、繰り返し送信と送信は互いに読み替えられてもよい。複数のTBを送信することは、同じTBを複数送信すること、又は、異なるTBを送信することを意味してもよい。 Note that in this disclosure, repeated transmission and transmission may be interpreted as interchangeable. Transmitting multiple TBs may mean transmitting the same TB multiple times, or transmitting different TBs.

[空間分割多重(SDM)]
 UEは、空間分割多重(Space Division Multiplexing:SDM)を適用したPUSCH繰り返し送信が同じ時間リソース及び同じ周波数リソースにスケジュールされることを想定してもよい。すなわち、UEは、コヒーレントな複数のパネルを用いた場合、SDMを適用したPUSCH繰り返し送信を、同じ時間リソース及び同じ周波数リソースにおいて送信してもよい。
[Space division multiplexing (SDM)]
The UE may assume that the PUSCH repetitive transmissions using Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) are scheduled on the same time and frequency resources. That is, the UE may assume that the PUSCH repetitive transmissions using Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) are scheduled on the same time and frequency resources. When used, repeated PUSCH transmissions using SDM may be transmitted in the same time resource and the same frequency resource.

 図4Aは、1つのCWでSDMを適用した繰り返し送信の例を示す図である。図4Aでは、PUSCH/PUCCHに対応するレイヤ#1-2とレイヤ#3-4の時間及び周波数リソースが同じである。 Figure 4A shows an example of repeated transmission using SDM in one CW. In Figure 4A, the time and frequency resources of layers #1-2 and #3-4 corresponding to PUSCH/PUCCH are the same.

 図4Bは、2つのCWでSDMを適用した繰り返し送信の例を示す図である。図4Bでは、PUSCH/PUCCHに対応するCW#1とCW#2の時間及び周波数リソースが同じである。 Figure 4B is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using SDM in two CWs. In Figure 4B, the time and frequency resources of CW#1 and CW#2 corresponding to PUSCH/PUCCH are the same.

 図4Cは、SDMを適用した繰り返し送信の例を示す図である。図4Cでは、PUSCH/PUCCHの繰り返し#1と繰り返し#2の時間及び周波数リソースが同じである。 Figure 4C is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using SDM. In Figure 4C, the time and frequency resources for PUSCH/PUCCH repetition #1 and repetition #2 are the same.

 なお、SDMを適用したPUSCH送信(例えば、PUSCH繰り返し送信)は、時間及び周波数リソースの少なくとも一部が重複する構成であってもよい。 Note that PUSCH transmission using SDM (e.g., repeated PUSCH transmission) may be configured such that at least a portion of the time and frequency resources overlap.

[周波数分割多重(FDM)]
 UEは、周波数分割多重(Frequency Division Multiplexing:FDM)を適用したPUSCH/PUCCH繰り返し送信が同じ時間リソース及び異なる周波数リソースにスケジュールされることを想定してもよい。すなわち、UEは、コヒーレントな複数のパネルを用いた場合、FDMを適用したPUSCH/PUCCH繰り返し送信を同じ時間リソース及び異なる周波数リソースにおいて送信してもよい。
[Frequency division multiplexing (FDM)]
The UE may assume that PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmissions using Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) are scheduled on the same time resources and different frequency resources. When a panel is used, PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission using FDM may be transmitted in the same time resource and different frequency resources.

 図5Aは、FDM(FDM-A)を適用した繰り返し送信の第1の例を示す図である。図5Aは、1つのTB/UCIにつき、1回のPUSCH/PUCCH繰り返し送信が行われる例を示している。 FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a first example of repeated transmission using FDM (FDM-A). FIG. 5A shows an example in which one PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission is performed for one TB/UCI.

 図5Bは、FDM(FDM-B)を適用した繰り返し送信の第2の例を示す図である。図5Bは、1つのTB/UCIにつき、2回のPUSCH/PUCCH繰り返し送信が行われる例を示している。 FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a second example of repeated transmission using FDM (FDM-B). FIG. 5B shows an example in which PUSCH/PUCCH repeated transmission is performed twice per TB/UCI.

 図5Cは、single frequency network(SFN)を適用した繰り返し送信の例を示す図である。図5Cは、1つのTB/UCIにつき、1つのPUSCH/PUCCHが異なるビーム/パネルを利用して送信される例を示している。 Figure 5C is a diagram showing an example of repeated transmission using a single frequency network (SFN). Figure 5C shows an example in which one PUSCH/PUCCH is transmitted using a different beam/panel for one TB/UCI.

 図4A、図4Bに示したように、ノンコードブックPUSCH送信に対して、空間分割多重方式に基づく同時マルチパネル送信(STxMP SDM scheme)を行う場合、1つのPUSCHの異なるレイヤ/DMRSポートは、別々にプリコードされ、異なるUPパネルから同時に送信され得る。 As shown in Figures 4A and 4B, when simultaneous multi-panel transmission based on spatial division multiplexing (STxMP SDM scheme) is performed for non-codebook PUSCH transmission, different layers/DMRS ports of one PUSCH can be precoded separately and transmitted simultaneously from different UP panels.

 ノンコードブックベースPUSCHの空間分割多重方式に基づく同時マルチパネル送信について、SRI指示(例えば、SRI indication)として、例えば以下の2つのオプションが想定される。 For simultaneous multi-panel transmission based on spatial division multiplexing of non-codebook-based PUSCH, the following two options are assumed as SRI indication (e.g., SRI indication):

《オプション1》
 1つのSRI組み合わせ(例えば、one SRI combination)が指示される。SRIの組み合わせは、2つのパネルにわたるノンコードブックのSRSリソース(例えば、NCB SRS resources across two panels)から指示されてもよい。
Option 1
One SRI combination is prescribed. SRI combinations may be prescribed from non-codebook SRS resources across two panels.

《オプション2》
 複数(例えば、2つ)のSRS組み合わせ(例えば、two SRI combinations)が指示される。各SRIの組み合わせは、1つのパネルのノンコードブックのSRSリソース(例えば、NCB SRS resources of one panel)から指示されてもよい。
Option 2
Multiple (e.g., two) SRS combinations may be indicated, where each SRI combination may be indicated from non-codebook SRS resources of one panel (e.g., NCB SRS resources of one panel).

 SRI組み合わせ(SRI combination)は、1又は複数のSRSリソース(例えば、ノンコードブック用のSRSリソース)を含んでいてもよい。例えば、1つのSRI組み合わせ(又は、SRIフィールド)により、各パネルにそれぞれ対応するSRI/SRSリソースが指示されてもよい。SRIの組み合わせは、SRIセット、又はSRIグループと読み替えられてもよい。 An SRI combination may include one or more SRS resources (e.g., SRS resources for non-codebooks). For example, one SRI combination (or SRI field) may indicate the SRI/SRS resources corresponding to each panel. An SRI combination may be read as an SRI set or an SRI group.

<マルチDCIベースのSTxMP>
 Rel.18以降において、マルチDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおけるSTxMPにおいて、ULチャネル/UL信号(例えば、PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS)の同時送信(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH、PUSCH+PUCCH、SRS+SRS)がサポートされることが想定される(図6参照)。一例として、複数PUSCHの同時送信(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH)、及び、PUSCH及びPUCCHの同時送信、の少なくとも一方がサポートされることが想定される。
<Multi-DCI based STxMP>
In Rel.18 and later, simultaneous transmission of UL channels/UL signals (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS) (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH, PUSCH+PUCCH, SRS+SRS) is expected to be supported in STxMP in a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP system (see FIG. 6). As an example, it is expected that at least one of simultaneous transmission of multiple PUSCHs (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH) and simultaneous transmission of PUSCH and PUCCH is supported.

 Rel.18以降において、PUSCH及びPUCCHの同時送信において、1つのPUCCHが、複数PUSCHと重複するケースにおけるUCIの多重/マッピング方法について検討されている。当該複数PUSCHは、同時送信される(STxMPに係る)複数PUSCHであってもよい。 In Rel. 18 and later, a method of multiplexing/mapping UCI in cases where one PUCCH overlaps with multiple PUSCHs in simultaneous transmission of PUSCH and PUCCH is being considered. The multiple PUSCHs may be multiple PUSCHs (related to STxMP) that are transmitted simultaneously.

 この場合、当該複数PUSCHは、それぞれ異なるTRP/パネルに関連づけられてもよい(図7参照)。 In this case, the multiple PUSCHs may each be associated with a different TRP/panel (see Figure 7).

 既存の仕様(Rel.17まで)において、マルチDCIマルチTRPについて、RRCパラメータ「ackNackFeedbackMode」が「separate」に設定されるとき、UEは、ダイナミックにスケジュールされるPUSCH/PUCCHが、時間ドメインにおいて、他のダイナミックにスケジュールされるPUSCH/PUCCHと重複することを想定しない(図7参照)。 In the existing specifications (up to Rel. 17), when the RRC parameter "ackNackFeedbackMode" is set to "separate" for multi-DCI multi-TRP, the UE does not assume that dynamically scheduled PUSCH/PUCCH overlaps with other dynamically scheduled PUSCH/PUCCH in the time domain (see Figure 7).

 これは、RRCパラメータ「ackNackFeedbackMode」が「separate」に設定されるときは、2つのTRP間について非理想(non-ideal)バックホールが想定され、各TRPは、他のTRPの動的なスケジュールをタイムリーに認識できないことに起因する。 This occurs because when the RRC parameter "ackNackFeedbackMode" is set to "separate", non-ideal backhaul is assumed between the two TRPs, and each TRP cannot recognize the dynamic schedule of the other TRP in a timely manner.

 なお、本開示において、ダイナミックにスケジュールされるPUSCH/PUCCHとは、ダイナミックグラントを用いてスケジュールされるPUSCH/PUCCH、DCIを用いて動的にスケジュールされるPUSCH/PUCCH、を意味してもよい。 In addition, in this disclosure, dynamically scheduled PUSCH/PUCCH may mean PUSCH/PUCCH scheduled using a dynamic grant, or PUSCH/PUCCH dynamically scheduled using DCI.

 また、UEは、異なるTRPに関連する2つの独立したPUSCHを、同じアクティブBWPにおいて同時に送信することができる。これらの2つのPUSCHに対応するレイヤの合計数は、最大X(又は、X以下)と規定されてもよい。Xは、例えば、4であってもよいし、他の値であってもよい。2つのPUSCHのそれぞれのレイヤ数の最大数は、X/2(例えば、2)であってもよいし、他の値であってもよい。 The UE may also transmit two independent PUSCHs associated with different TRPs simultaneously in the same active BWP. The total number of layers corresponding to these two PUSCHs may be specified as a maximum of X (or less than or equal to X), where X may be, for example, 4 or some other value. The maximum number of layers for each of the two PUSCHs may be X/2 (for example, 2) or some other value.

 マルチDCIベースのSTxMPについて、PUSCHの同時送信(例えば、STxMP PUSCH+PUSCH transmission)のPUSCHのスケジュールにおいて、SRSリソースセットとCORESETプールインデックスが所定ルールに基づいて関連づけられてもよい。例えば、第1のSRSリソースセットが第1のCORESETプールインデックス(例えば、0)に関連づけられ、他のSRSリソースセットが第2のCORESETプールインデックス(例えば、1)に関連づけられてもよい。 For multi-DCI based STxMP, in the PUSCH schedule of simultaneous PUSCH transmission (e.g., STxMP PUSCH+PUSCH transmission), the SRS resource set and the CORESET pool index may be associated based on a predetermined rule. For example, a first SRS resource set may be associated with a first CORESET pool index (e.g., 0), and another SRS resource set may be associated with a second CORESET pool index (e.g., 1).

 PUSCHは、CORESERプールインデックスが同じ値のSRSリソースセットと関連づけられてもよい。例えば、PUSCHは、当該PUSCHをスケジュールするPDCCHに対応するCORESETのCORESERプールインデックスに関連づけられるSRSリソースセットに関連づけられてもよい。 The PUSCH may be associated with an SRS resource set that has the same CORESER pool index. For example, the PUSCH may be associated with an SRS resource set that is associated with the CORESER pool index of the CORESET that corresponds to the PDCCH that schedules the PUSCH.

 DCIにおけるSRI/TPMIフィールドの解釈方法が、ダイナミックグラントベースのPUSCH(例えば、DG-PUSCH))と設定グラントベースのPUSCH(例えば、タイプ2のCG-PUSCH)で別々であってもよい。 The method of interpreting the SRI/TPMI field in the DCI may be different for dynamic grant-based PUSCH (e.g., DG-PUSCH) and configuration grant-based PUSCH (e.g., type 2 CG-PUSCH).

 DG-PUSCHの場合、指示されたSRI/TPMIフィールドは、PUSCHをスケジュールするDCI(例えば、scheduling DCI format0_1/0_2)を受信したCORESETのCORESETプールインデックスと同じ値に関連づけられたSRSリソースセットに対応してもよい。タイプ2のCG-PUSCHの場合、指示されたSRI/TPMIフィールドは、アクティベーションDCIを受信したCORESETのCORESERプールインデックスと同じ値に関連づけられたSRSリソースセットに対応してもよい。 In the case of DG-PUSCH, the indicated SRI/TPMI field may correspond to the SRS resource set associated with the same value as the CORESET pool index of the CORESET in which the DCI scheduling the PUSCH (e.g., scheduling DCI format 0_1/0_2) was received. In the case of CG-PUSCH of type 2, the indicated SRI/TPMI field may correspond to the SRS resource set associated with the same value as the CORESER pool index of the CORESET in which the activation DCI was received.

 タイプ1のCG-PUSCHの場合、設定グラントに関連するRRCパラメータ(例えば、ConfiguredGrantConfig)に1つのSRSリソースセットインデックスが設定され、所定のRRCパラメータ(例えば、srs-ResourceIndicator/precodingAndNumberOfLayers)が当該SRSリソースセットに対応してもよい。 In the case of type 1 CG-PUSCH, one SRS resource set index may be set in the RRC parameters related to the configuration grant (e.g., ConfiguredGrantConfig), and a specific RRC parameter (e.g., srs-ResourceIndicator/precodingAndNumberOfLayers) may correspond to the SRS resource set.

 マルチDCIベースのSTxMP(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH)について、非対称パネルを考慮し、2つのパネル/TRPに対して、SRSリソース数/SRSポート(又は、SRSポート数)/最大ランク(例えば、maxrank)/コードブックサブセット/フルパワーモードを別々に設定することも想定される。非対称パネルは、2つのパネルが、SRSポート数/最大ランク/コードブックサブセット等について異なる能力を有することを意味してもよい。 For multi-DCI based STxMP (e.g. PUSCH+PUSCH), it is also assumed that asymmetric panels are considered and the number of SRS resources/SRS ports (or number of SRS ports)/max rank (e.g. maxrank)/codebook subset/full power mode are configured separately for the two panels/TRPs. Asymmetric panels may mean that the two panels have different capabilities for number of SRS ports/max rank/codebook subset etc.

 例えば、マルチDCIベースのSTxMP(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH)に対して2つのSRSリソースセットが設定される場合、設定される2つのSRSリソースセットに対応する所定パラメータが別々に設定されてもよい。所定パラメータは、例えば、SRSリソース数、最大ランク/SSBインデックスの最大数(例えば、maxRank/Lmax)、コードブックサブセット(例えば、codebook subset)、及びフルパワーモード(例えば、fullpower mode)の少なくとも一つであってもよい。 For example, when two SRS resource sets are configured for multi-DCI-based STxMP (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH), the predetermined parameters corresponding to the two configured SRS resource sets may be configured separately. The predetermined parameters may be, for example, at least one of the number of SRS resources, the maximum number of maximum rank/SSB index (e.g., maxRank/Lmax), the codebook subset, and the full power mode.

(グループベースビーム報告)
 将来の無線通信システム(例えば、Rel.17以降)に向けて、複数のパネル(マルチパネル)を有するユーザ端末(user terminal、User Equipment(UE))、複数の送受信ポイント(マルチTransmission/Reception Point(TRP))などについてのビーム管理関連の拡張(例えば、複数TRPに適したビームレポート、拡張グループベースビーム報告と呼ばれてもよい)が検討されている。
(Group-Based Beam Report)
For future wireless communication systems (e.g., Rel. 17 and later), beam management-related extensions (e.g., beam reports suitable for multiple TRPs, which may also be called extended group-based beam reports) for user terminals (user terminals, User Equipment (UE)) having multiple panels (multi-panels) and multiple transmission/reception points (multi-TRPs) are being considered.

 グループベースビーム報告は、複数(例えば、2つ)のCRI/SSBRIを含む1グループについて1つのレポートで報告できるため、マルチTRP送信、マルチパネル受信などが適用される場合に好適である。例えば、TRP1のベストビームをRSRP#1で、TRP2のベストビームを差分RSRP#2として報告するために利用できる。 Group-based beam reporting is suitable for cases where multi-TRP transmission, multi-panel reception, etc. are applied, since it can report on a group containing multiple (e.g., two) CRIs/SSBRIs in one report. For example, it can be used to report the best beam for TRP1 as RSRP#1, and the best beam for TRP2 as differential RSRP#2.

 Rel.15及び16では、グループベースビーム報告(groupBasedBeamReporting)が有効に設定されるUEは、各レポート設定について2つの異なるCRI/SSBRI(ビームインデックスと読み替えられてもよい)を含む1グループしか報告することができない。このため、Rel.17に向けて、グループベースビーム報告によって報告できるグループ数を拡張することが想定される。 In Rel. 15 and 16, a UE with groupBasedBeamReporting enabled can only report one group containing two different CRI/SSBRI (which may be read as beam index) for each reporting setting. For this reason, it is expected that the number of groups that can be reported by group-based beam reporting will be expanded for Rel. 17.

 例えば、2つのチャネル測定用のリソースセット(例えば、CMRセット)は、周期的(periodic)/半永久的(semi-persistent)/非周期的(aperiodic)リソースタイプに設定/トリガされてもよい。2つのチャネル測定用のリソースセット(例えば、CMRセット)は、例えば、2つのCSI-SSB-リソースセット/2つのNZP-CSI-RS-リソースセットであってもよい。UEは、最大4つのCRI/SSBRIのグループを報告可能となるように設定されてもよい。なお、報告可能なグループ数(又は、候補数1/2/3/4)は、上位レイヤパラメータ(例えば、nrofReportedGroups)により設定されてもよい。 For example, the resource sets for two channel measurements (e.g., CMR set) may be configured/triggered to periodic/semi-persistent/aperiodic resource types. The resource sets for two channel measurements (e.g., CMR set) may be, for example, two CSI-SSB-resource sets/two NZP-CSI-RS-resource sets. The UE may be configured to be able to report up to four CRI/SSBRI groups. The number of groups that can be reported (or the number of candidates 1/2/3/4) may be configured by a higher layer parameter (e.g., nrofReportedGroups).

 各グループは、複数(例えば、2つ)のCRI/SSBRIを有し、各グループのCRI/SSBRIは、報告設定(例えば、report setting)用の2つのCSIリソースセット(CSI-SSB-リソースセット/NZP-CSI-RS-リソースセット)からそれぞれ選択されてもよい。また、各グループの2つのCRI/SSBRIは、UEが同時に受信すること(例えば、1つの空間ドメイン受信フィルタを用いて同時に受信すること)が可能であることを意味してもよい。 Each group may have multiple (e.g., two) CRI/SSBRIs, and the CRI/SSBRIs of each group may be selected from two CSI resource sets (CSI-SSB-resource set/NZP-CSI-RS-resource set) for report setting. The two CRI/SSBRIs of each group may also mean that the UE can receive simultaneously (e.g., receive simultaneously using one spatial domain receive filter).

 図8は、拡張グループベースビーム報告を行う場合のCSIレポートの一例を示す図である。図8では、グループベースのCSI/RSRP又はSSBRI/RSRP報告のための1つのレポート(例えば、n番目のCSIレポート#n)に含まれるCSIフィールドのマッピング順を示す。 Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of a CSI report when performing extended group-based beam reporting. Figure 8 shows the mapping order of CSI fields included in one report (e.g., the nth CSI report #n) for group-based CSI/RSRP or SSBRI/RSRP reporting.

 CSIレポートには、最大X個(例えば、X=4)のリソースグループが含まれてもよい。各グループには、複数(例えば、2つ)のCRI/SSBRIが含まれる。ここでは、各リソースグループとして、CRI又はSSBRI#1と、CRI又はSSBRI#2とが報告される場合を示している。 The CSI report may include up to X resource groups (e.g., X=4). Each group includes multiple (e.g., two) CRIs/SSBRIs. Here, a case is shown in which CRI or SSBRI#1 and CRI or SSBRI#2 are reported for each resource group.

 CSIフィールドにリソースセット指標(例えば、Resource set indicator)が含まれてもよい。リソースセット指標の値によって、L1-RSRPの最大の測定値に関連付けられるCSIリソースセットが示されてもよい。リソースセット指標の値により、第1のリソースグループのCRI又はSSBRI#1が報告されるCSIリソースセットが指示されてもよい。例えば、0又は1の値を有する1ビットのリソースセット指標は、それぞれ1番目又は2番目のCSIリソースセットを示し、そこから1番目のリソースグループのCRI又はSSBRI#1がレポートされてもよい。残りの全てのリソースグループ(例えば、報告される他のリソースグループがある場合)は、第1のリソースグループと同じマッピング順に従う。例えば、残りの全てのリソースグループのCRI又はSSBRI#1は、リソースセット指標で指示されたCSIリソースセットから報告(又は、選択)されてもよい。 The CSI field may include a resource set indicator (e.g., Resource Set Indicator). The value of the resource set indicator may indicate the CSI resource set associated with the maximum measured value of L1-RSRP. The value of the resource set indicator may indicate the CSI resource set from which the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group is reported. For example, a 1-bit resource set indicator having a value of 0 or 1 may indicate the first or second CSI resource set, respectively, from which the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group may be reported. All remaining resource groups (e.g., if there are other resource groups to be reported) follow the same mapping order as the first resource group. For example, the CRI or SSBRI#1 of all remaining resource groups may be reported (or selected) from the CSI resource set indicated by the resource set indicator.

 つまり、各グループのCRI又はSSBRI#1は、リソースセット指標(例えば、Resource set indicator)により指示されたCSIリソースセットから報告(又は、選択)され、CRI又はSSBRI#2は、他のCSIリソースセットから報告(又は、選択)されてもよい。このように、全てのリソースグループにおいて、CRI又はSSBRI#1と、CRI又はSSBRI#2とは、異なるCSIリソースセットから報告されてもよい。 In other words, the CRI or SSBRI#1 of each group may be reported (or selected) from a CSI resource set indicated by a resource set indicator (e.g., a Resource Set Indicator), and the CRI or SSBRI#2 may be reported (or selected) from another CSI resource set. In this way, in all resource groups, the CRI or SSBRI#1 and the CRI or SSBRI#2 may be reported from different CSI resource sets.

 また、各リソースグループのビームインデックス(例えば、CRI又はSSBRI)に対応するRSRPが報告される。例えば、特定のグループのCRI又はSSBRIのRSRPが報告され、他のRSRPは、特定のグループのCRI又はSSBRIのRSRPとの差分が報告されてもよい。特定のグループのCRI又はSSBRIのRSRPは、第1のリソースグループのCRI又はSSBRI#1のRSRPであってもよい。 Also, the RSRP corresponding to the beam index (e.g., CRI or SSBRI) of each resource group is reported. For example, the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of a particular group may be reported, and the other RSRP may be a difference from the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of the particular group. The RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI of a particular group may be the RSRP of the CRI or SSBRI#1 of the first resource group.

 拡張グループベースビーム報告は、所定の上位レイヤパラメータ(例えば、groupBasedBeamReporting-r17)により設定(又は、有効化/アクティブ化が設定)されてもよい。あるいは、拡張グループベースビーム報告は、報告するグループ数に関する上位レイヤパラメータ(例えば、nrofReportedGroups-r17)が設定される場合に有効であると判断されてもよい。 Enhanced group-based beam reporting may be configured (or enabled/activated) by a predetermined upper layer parameter (e.g., groupBasedBeamReporting-r17). Alternatively, enhanced group-based beam reporting may be determined to be enabled when an upper layer parameter regarding the number of groups to report (e.g., nrofReportedGroups-r17) is configured.

(分析)
<背景1>
 Rel.17では、パネル固有(panel-specific)のUE能力として、「SRS(アンテナ)ポートのサポートされる数の最大値(the maximum supported number of SRS antenna ports)」が報告され得る。このSRSポートのサポート数の最大値は、L1-RSRP/L1-SINR報告において、UE能力値セットインデックスを報告することによってサポートされる。SRS(アンテナ)ポートのサポートされる数の最大値(the maximum supported number of SRS antenna ports)」は、サポートされるSRSポートの最大数、SRSポートの最大サポート数、などと互いに読み替えられてよい。
(analysis)
<Background 1>
In Rel. 17, "the maximum supported number of SRS (antenna) ports" may be reported as a panel-specific UE capability. This maximum supported number of SRS ports is supported by reporting a UE capability value set index in the L1-RSRP/L1-SINR report. The "maximum supported number of SRS (antenna) ports" may be read as the maximum number of supported SRS ports, the maximum supported number of SRS ports, etc.

 具体的には、UEがCSI-ReportConfigを設定され、上位レイヤパラメータreportQuantityがcri-RSRP- Index又はssb-Index-RSRP- Indexにセットされると、SRSポートのサポート数の最大値を指示するUE能力値セットのインデックスが、SSBRI/CRI及びL1-RSRPの組とともに報告される。 Specifically, when a UE is configured with CSI-ReportConfig and the higher layer parameter reportQuantity is set to cri-RSRP- Index or ssb-Index-RSRP- Index, the index of the UE capability set indicating the maximum number of SRS ports supported is reported together with the SSBRI/CRI and L1-RSRP pair.

<背景2>
 マルチTRPにおいて、時間分割多重(time division multiplexing:TDM)を利用したPUSCHの繰り返し送信がサポートされる。Rel.17では、2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定され得る。しかしながら、2つの非対称パネルを利用したマルチTRPのPUSCH送信はサポートされていない。CB PUSCHにおいて、2つのSRIによって指示される2つのSRSリソースは、同じポート数を有するべきである。一方で、NCB PUSCHにおいて、2つのSRSリソースセットは、同じSRSリソース数を有するべきである。
<Background 2>
In multi-TRP, repeated transmission of PUSCH using time division multiplexing (TDM) is supported. In Rel. 17, two CB/NCB SRS resource sets can be configured. However, multi-TRP PUSCH transmission using two asymmetric panels is not supported. In CB PUSCH, the two SRS resources indicated by the two SRIs should have the same port number. Meanwhile, in NCB PUSCH, the two SRS resource sets should have the same SRS resource number.

 例えば、2つのSRIが指示される場合、UEは、指示された2つのSRSリソースのnrofSRS-Ports(SRSポート数)が同じであることを期待しなければならない。また、srs-ResourceSetToAddModList、又は、srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2において、2つのSRSリソースセットが設定され、SRS-ResourceSetにおける上位レイヤパラメータusageがnonCodebookにセットされる場合、UEは、当該2つのSRSリソースセットにおいて、異なる数のSRSリソースを設定されることを期待されない。 For example, if two SRIs are indicated, the UE must expect the nrofSRS-Ports (number of SRS ports) of the two indicated SRS resources to be the same. Also, if two SRS resource sets are configured in srs-ResourceSetToAddModList or srs-ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2 and the upper layer parameter usage in SRS-ResourceSet is set to nonCodebook, the UE is not expected to configure different numbers of SRS resources in the two SRS resource sets.

<背景3>
 上述したように、Rel.18以降では、シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおける同時マルチパネル送信(STxMP)において、SDM/SFNを利用したUL送信(例えばPUSCH送信)がサポートされる。当該STxMPでは、2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定され得る。また、2つのSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドが指示され得る。
<Background 3>
As described above, in Rel. 18 and later, simultaneous multi-panel transmission (STxMP) in a single DCI-based multi-TRP system supports UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH transmission) using SDM/SFN. In the STxMP, two CB/NCB SRS resource sets can be configured. Also, two SRI/TPMI fields can be indicated.

 しかしながら、Rel.18では、異なる能力(例えば、異なるSRSポート数)を有する2つの非対称パネルを利用したマルチTRPのPUSCH送信はサポートされていない。上述したように、CB PUSCHにおいて、2つのSRIによって指示される2つのSRSリソースは、同じポート数を有するべきである。一方で、NCB PUSCHにおいて、2つのSRSリソースセットは、同じSRSリソース数を有するべきである。 However, Rel. 18 does not support multi-TRP PUSCH transmission using two asymmetric panels with different capabilities (e.g., different number of SRS ports). As mentioned above, in CB PUSCH, the two SRS resources indicated by the two SRIs should have the same number of ports. On the other hand, in NCB PUSCH, the two SRS resource sets should have the same number of SRS resources.

 つまり、Rel.18では、以下をサポートすることは合意されていない:
・シングルDCIベースのSTxMPにおいて、CB(フルパワーモード2が設定されていない場合)/NCBのための2つのSRSリソースセットに対して、異なる数のSRSリソースが設定されること。
・CB PUSCHにおいて、2つのSRIによって指示される2つのSRSリソースは、それぞれ異なるポート数を有してもよい。
That is, in Rel. 18, there is no agreement to support:
In single DCI-based STxMP, different numbers of SRS resources are configured for the two SRS resource sets for CB (when full power mode 2 is not configured)/NCB.
In CB PUSCH, the two SRS resources indicated by the two SRIs may have different port numbers.

 また、Rel.18では、マルチDCIベースのSTxMP(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH)に対して設定される2つのSRSリソースセットにおいて、各セットのSRSリソース/SRSポートの最大数に関して、既存仕様(例えばRel.17)が再利用されてもよい。 In addition, in Rel. 18, for two SRS resource sets configured for multi-DCI-based STxMP (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH), existing specifications (e.g., Rel. 17) may be reused with respect to the maximum number of SRS resources/SRS ports in each set.

 ここで、複数のSRSリソースセット間におけるフルパワーモードとアンテナポートコヒーレンシータイプに関して、2つの異なる設定をサポートするかどうか、又はその設定方法が検討されている。 Here, it is considered whether or how to support two different configurations regarding full power mode and antenna port coherency type between multiple SRS resource sets.

<背景4>
 UL送信(例えばPUSCH/SRS)におけるパネル固有(panel-specific)のパラメータは、以下のオプション1~6の少なくとも1つに基づいて決定されてよい。
<Background 4>
Panel-specific parameters in UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH/SRS) may be determined based on at least one of the following options 1 to 6.

(オプション1)
 パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、SRSリソースセット/SRSリソースに関連付けられ/設定されてもよい。例えば、PUSCH送信におけるパネル固有のパラメータは、当該PUSCH送信に対応するSRSリソースセットインジケータによって指示されるSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースインジケータ(SRI)によって指示されるSRSリソースから決定されてよい。
(Option 1)
A panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability value set (index) may be associated/configured with an SRS resource set/SRS resource. For example, a panel-specific parameter for a PUSCH transmission may be determined from an SRS resource set indicated by an SRS resource set indicator/SRS resource indicated by an SRS resource indicator (SRI) corresponding to the PUSCH transmission.

(オプション2)
 パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、ジョイントTCI/UL TCIに関連付けられ/設定されてもよい。例えば、UL送信におけるパネル固有のパラメータは、当該UL送信に対応するジョイントTCI/UL TCIから決定されてよい。
(Option 2)
Panel-specific parameters/panel indices/UE capability value sets (indexes) may be associated/configured to joint TCI/UL TCI. For example, panel-specific parameters for a UL transmission may be determined from the joint TCI/UL TCI corresponding to the UL transmission.

(オプション3)
 パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、ある特定の参照信号(例えばSSB/CSI-RS/SRS)のリソース/リソースセットに関連付けられ/設定されてもよい。例えば、UL送信におけるパネル固有のパラメータは、当該UL送信に対応するQCLソースRS/PL RS(パスロス参照信号)から決定されてよい。
(Option 3)
Panel specific parameters/panel index/UE capability set (index) may be associated/configured to a resource/resource set of a certain reference signal (e.g. SSB/CSI-RS/SRS). For example, panel specific parameters for UL transmission may be determined from the QCL source RS/PL RS (path loss reference signal) corresponding to the UL transmission.

(オプション4)
 パネル固有のパラメータは、UE能力値セット(インデックス)に関連付けられ/設定されてもよい。例えば、UL送信におけるパネル固有のパラメータは、当該UL送信に対応するQCLソースRS/PL RS(パスロス参照信号)と、あるビーム報告において当該参照信号に対して報告されるUE能力値セット(インデックス)と、から決定されてよい。
(Option 4)
The panel-specific parameters may be associated/configured to a UE capability value set (index). For example, the panel-specific parameters for a UL transmission may be determined from the QCL source RS/PL RS (path loss reference signal) corresponding to the UL transmission and the UE capability value set (index) reported for the reference signal in a beam report.

(オプション5)
 パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、スケジューリング情報(例えばUL送信のスケジューリングDCI)において直接指示されてもよい。
(Option 5)
The panel-specific parameters/panel index/UE capability value set (index) may be directly indicated in the scheduling information (e.g., scheduling DCI for UL transmission).

(オプション6)
 パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、グループベースビーム報告に関連してもよい。例えば、パネル固有のパラメータ/パネルインデックス/UE能力値セット(インデックス)は、ビームのペアが同時に受信され得るDLグループベースビーム報告の各ビーム/各ビームのペアに関連してもよく、ビームのペアが同時に送信され得るRel.18のULグループベースビーム報告の各ビーム/各ビームのペアに関連してもよい。
(Option 6)
A panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability set (index) may be associated with a group-based beam report, e.g., a panel-specific parameter/panel index/UE capability set (index) may be associated with each beam/pair of beams in a DL group-based beam report where the pair of beams may be received simultaneously, or may be associated with each beam/pair of beams in a Rel. 18 UL group-based beam report where the pair of beams may be transmitted simultaneously.

 上述した各オプションにおいて、パネル固有のパラメータは、SRSポート数/SRSリソース数/フルパワーモード/コードブックサブセットの少なくとも1つを参照し得る。 In each of the above options, the panel-specific parameters may refer to at least one of the following: number of SRS ports/number of SRS resources/full power mode/codebook subset.

<背景5>
 上述したように、Rel.18以降にでは、マルチDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおけるSTxMPにおいて、ULチャネル/UL信号(例えば、PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS)の同時送信(例えば、PUSCH+PUSCH、PUSCH+PUCCH、SRS+SRS)がサポートされる。当該STxMPでは、2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定され得る。
<Background 5>
As mentioned above, in Rel.18 and later, simultaneous transmission (e.g., PUSCH+PUSCH, PUSCH+PUCCH, SRS+SRS) of UL channels/UL signals (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH/SRS) is supported in STxMP in a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP system. In the STxMP, two CB/NCB SRS resource sets can be configured.

 例えば、CORESETPoolInex#0(=0)は、より低いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる。また、CORESETPoolIndex#1(=1)は、より高いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる。 For example, CORESETPoolInex#0 (=0) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with the lower ID, and CORESETPoolIndex#1 (=1) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with the higher ID.

<問題1>
 ところで、あるシナリオ(例えば上述したシングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいてTDMを適用した繰り返し送信、シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいてSDM/SFNを適用したSTxMP)では、非対称パネル、つまり、UEが異なる能力を有する2つのパネルを有するケースが存在し得る。この場合、SRSポート数/SRSリソース数/ランク数/フルパワーモード/コードブックサブセット等を含む異なるパネル固有のパラメータと、2つのSRSリソースセットと、を関連付け/設定することが可能である。
<Question 1>
However, in some scenarios (e.g., the above-mentioned single DCI-based multi-TRP with TDM repetitive transmission, single DCI-based multi-TRP with SDM/SFN STxMP), there may be asymmetric panels, i.e., the UE has two panels with different capabilities. In this case, it is possible to associate/configure the two SRS resource sets with different panel-specific parameters, including number of SRS ports/number of SRS resources/rank number/full power mode/codebook subset, etc.

 一方で、他の可能性のあるシナリオとして、UEが2つ以上のパネルを有し、複数のパネル間でパネルの切り替えが行われるケースが存在し得る。より具体的には、例えばUEが、3つのパネルを有し、3つのパネルは、それぞれ2つ、2つ、4つのポートを有する場合を想定する。 On the other hand, another possible scenario may be where the UE has two or more panels and switches between multiple panels. More specifically, consider a case where the UE has three panels, each with two, two, and four ports, respectively.

 あるUL送信では、2ポート+2ポートの2つのパネルを利用するSTxMPと、2ポート+4ポートの2つのパネルを利用するSTxMPとを切り替えることが想定される。パネルの切り替えは、UEの移動、又はUEパネルのアクティベーション/ディアクティベーションに起因する場合がある。 In a given UL transmission, it is assumed that there will be a switch between STxMP using two panels (2 ports + 2 ports) and STxMP using two panels (2 ports + 4 ports). The panel switch may be due to UE movement or activation/deactivation of the UE panel.

 このようなパネルの切り替えをサポートするためのUE動作については、まだ明確に規定されていない。 UE behavior to support such panel switching has not yet been clearly specified.

<問題2>
 さらに、上述した複数(例えば2つの)パネルごとにUL送信を動的に切り替えることが求められる。この場合、パネル切り替えを指示するDCIの具体的なフィールド内容を規定する必要がある。
<Question 2>
Furthermore, it is required to dynamically switch UL transmission for each of the above-mentioned multiple (e.g., two) panels. In this case, it is necessary to specify specific field contents of DCI that instructs panel switching.

<問題3>
 また、マルチDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおけるSTxMPでは、上述した通り、CORESETPoolInex#0(=0)は、より低いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられ、CORESETPoolIndex#1(=1)は、より高いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる。この対応関係は、固定されている。
<Question 3>
Also, in STxMP in a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP system, as described above, CORESETPoolInex#0 (=0) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with a lower ID, and CORESETPoolIndex#1 (=1) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with a higher ID. This correspondence is fixed.

 しかしながら、UEが移動すると、TRP(CORESETPoolIndex)とパネルとの対応関係が変わることが想定される。例えば複数パネルが対称パネルであれば、パネル切り替えの際に、対応するSRSリソースセットのQCLを更新すれば特に問題はない。 However, when the UE moves, it is expected that the correspondence between the TRP (CORESETPoolIndex) and the panel will change. For example, if the multiple panels are symmetrical, there will be no problem if the QCL of the corresponding SRS resource set is updated when switching panels.

 対称パネルでは、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの間の固定された関係が働く。このため、パネル切り替えの際に、基地局(gNB)は、SRSリソースセット#0のQCLを更新し、SRSリソースセット#0をパネル#1に適用することが可能になる。 In a symmetric panel, a fixed relationship between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource set applies. Therefore, when switching panels, the base station (gNB) can update the QCL of SRS resource set #0 and apply SRS resource set #0 to panel #1.

 一方で、非対称パネルのケースでは、UEの移動によってTRP(CORESETPoolIndex)とパネルとの対応関係が変更されると、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの間の固定された関係に問題が生じ得る。例えば、パネル#0が2ポートを有し、パネル#1が4ポートを有する場合において、SRSリソースセット#0には2ポートが設定され、SRSリソースセット#1には4ポートが設定されるケースを想定する。 On the other hand, in the case of asymmetric panels, if the correspondence between the TRP (CORESETPoolIndex) and the panel changes due to UE movement, problems may occur with the fixed relationship between CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set. For example, consider a case where panel #0 has two ports and panel #1 has four ports, and two ports are configured in SRS resource set #0 and four ports are configured in SRS resource set #1.

 例えば、UEが移動してパネル#1からTRP#0に向けてUL送信する場合、CORESETPoolIndex=0がまだSRSリソースセット#0に関連付けられていることが問題である。本来であれば、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの対応関係も切り替えられる必要がある。 For example, if a UE moves and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #0, the problem is that CORESETPoolIndex=0 is still associated with SRS resource set #0. Ideally, the correspondence between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource set should also be switchable.

 このように、非対称パネルでは、SRSリソースセット#0をパネル#1に適用することはできないので、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの間の固定された関係は機能しない。 Thus, in an asymmetric panel, the fixed relationship between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource sets does not work, since SRS resource set #0 cannot be applied to panel #1.

<問題4>
 また、2以上のパネルが適用されるSTxMPは、将来的にさらに拡張される可能性ある。特にマルチDCIベースのマルチTRPシステムにおけるSTxMPにおいて、2以上のパネルをサポートする方法について、検討の余地がある。
<Question 4>
In addition, STxMP, which is applied to two or more panels, may be further expanded in the future. In particular, there is room for consideration on how to support two or more panels in STxMP in a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP system.

 上述のように、将来の無線通信システム(Rel.18以降)では、UEにおいて、複数のビーム/パネル/TRPを利用したUL送信(例えば、simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission(STxMP))を行うことが検討されている。 As mentioned above, in future wireless communication systems (Rel. 18 and later), it is being considered that UEs will perform UL transmission using multiple beams/panels/TRPs (e.g., simultaneous multi-panel UL transmission (STxMP)).

 しかしながら、複数パネル(特に非対称パネル)を適用するUL送信をサポートする方法について検討が十分でない。 However, there has been insufficient consideration given to how to support UL transmissions that use multiple panels (especially asymmetric panels).

 この検討が十分でない場合、重複するULチャネル/信号の適切な送信を行うことができず、スループットの低下など、システム性能が低下するおそれがある。 If this consideration is not sufficient, overlapping UL channels/signals may not be transmitted properly, which may result in reduced system performance, including reduced throughput.

 そこで、本発明者らは、これらの問題を解決する方法を着想した。 The inventors therefore came up with a method to solve these problems.

 以下、本開示に係る実施形態について、図面を参照して詳細に説明する。各実施形態に係る無線通信方法は、それぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 Embodiments of the present disclosure will now be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The wireless communication methods according to the embodiments may be applied independently or in combination.

(各種読み替え等)
 本開示において、「A/B」及び「A及びBの少なくとも一方」は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「A/B/C」は、「A、B及びCの少なくとも1つ」を意味してもよい。
(Various changes in interpretation, etc.)
In the present disclosure, "A/B" and "at least one of A and B" may be interpreted as interchangeable. Also, in the present disclosure, "A/B/C" may mean "at least one of A, B, and C."

 本開示において、通知、アクティベート、ディアクティベート、指示(又は指定(indicate))、選択(select)、設定(configure)、更新(update)、決定(determine)などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、サポートする、制御する、制御できる、動作する、動作できるなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as notify, activate, deactivate, indicate, select, configure, update, and determine may be read as interchangeable terms. In this disclosure, terms such as support, control, capable of control, operate, and capable of operating may be read as interchangeable terms.

 本開示において、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control(RRC))、RRCパラメータ、RRCメッセージ、上位レイヤパラメータ、フィールド、情報要素(Information Element(IE))、設定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、Medium Access Control制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))、更新コマンド、アクティベーション/ディアクティベーションコマンドなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, Radio Resource Control (RRC), RRC parameters, RRC messages, higher layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, Medium Access Control (MAC Control Element (CE)), update commands, activation/deactivation commands, etc. may be interchangeable.

 本開示において、上位レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報、その他のメッセージ(例えば、測位用プロトコル(例えば、NR Positioning Protocol A(NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol(LPP))メッセージなどの、コアネットワークからのメッセージ)などのいずれか、又はこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, the higher layer signaling may be, for example, any one of Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocols (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.

 本開示において、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))、MAC Protocol Data Unit(PDU)などを用いてもよい。ブロードキャスト情報は、例えば、マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))、最低限のシステム情報(Remaining Minimum System Information(RMSI))、その他のシステム情報(Other System Information(OSI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, the MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc. The broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.

 本開示において、物理レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、下りリンク制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上りリンク制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, the physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.

 本開示において、マルチTRP、マルチTRPシステム、マルチTRP送信、マルチPDSCH、マルチTRPを用いるチャネル、複数のTCI状態/空間関係を用いるチャネル、マルチTRPがRRC/DCIによって有効化されること、複数のTCI状態/空間関係がRRC/DCIによって有効化されること、シングルDCIに基づくマルチTRPとマルチDCIに基づくマルチTRPとの少なくとも1つ、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、マルチDCIに基づくマルチTRP、CORESETに対して1のCORESETプールインデックス(CORESETPoolIndex)値が設定されること、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、シングルDCIに基づくマルチTRP、TCIフィールドの少なくとも1つのコードポイントが2つのTCI状態にマップされること、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, multi-TRP, multi-TRP system, multi-TRP transmission, multi-PDSCH, channel using multi-TRP, channel using multiple TCI states/spatial relationships, multi-TRP enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships enabled by RRC/DCI, and at least one of multi-TRP based on a single DCI and multi-TRP based on multiple DCI may be read as interchangeable. In the present disclosure, multi-TRP based on multi-DCI, and a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 is set for the CORESET may be read as interchangeable. In the present disclosure, multi-TRP based on a single DCI, and at least one code point of the TCI field is mapped to two TCI states may be read as interchangeable.

 本開示において、シングルTRP、シングルDCI、シングルPDCCH、シングルDCIに基づくマルチTRP、シングルTRPシステム、シングルTRP送信、シングルPDSCH、シングルTRPを用いるチャネル、1つのTCI状態/空間関係を用いるチャネル、マルチTRPがRRC/DCIによって有効化されないこと、複数のTCI状態/空間関係がRRC/DCIによって有効化されないこと、いずれのCORESETに対しても1のCORESETプールインデックス(CORESETPoolIndex)値が設定されず、且つ、TCIフィールドのいずれのコードポイントも2つのTCI状態にマップされないこと、少なくとも1つのTCIコードポイント上の2つのTCI状態をアクティベートされること、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, single TRP, single DCI, single PDCCH, multi-TRP based on single DCI, single TRP system, single TRP transmission, single PDSCH, channel using single TRP, channel using one TCI state/spatial relationship, multi-TRP not being enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships not being enabled by RRC/DCI, a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 not being set for any CORESET and no code point in the TCI field being mapped to two TCI states, and two TCI states on at least one TCI code point being activated may be read as interchangeable.

 本開示において、パネル、UE能力値セット(例えば、UE capability value set)、TRP、SRSリソースセット、CORESETプールインデックス、ビームグループ、TCI状態のグループ、空間関係のグループ、参照信号のグループ、パスロスRSのグループ、アンテナ、アンテナポート、UL送信空間フィルタ、UL空間ドメインフィルタ、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, panel, UE capability value set (e.g., UE capability value set), TRP, SRS resource set, CORESET pool index, beam group, TCI state group, spatial relationship group, reference signal group, path loss RS group, antenna, antenna port, UL transmit spatial filter, and UL spatial domain filter may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 本開示において、STxMP、マルチパネルを利用した同時UL送信、マルチパネルを利用した少なくとも同じ時間リソース/ドメインにおけるUL送信(複数のUL送信)、マルチTRPを利用した少なくとも同じ時間リソース/ドメインにおけるUL送信(複数のUL送信)、マルチTRP向けの少なくとも同じ時間リソース/ドメインにおけるUL送信(複数のUL送信)、等は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, STxMP, simultaneous UL transmission using multi-panel, UL transmission (multiple UL transmissions) in at least the same time resource/domain using multi-panel, UL transmission (multiple UL transmissions) in at least the same time resource/domain using multi-TRP, UL transmission (multiple UL transmissions) in at least the same time resource/domain for multi-TRP, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 本開示において、無視、ドロップ、中止、キャンセル、パンクチャ、レートマッチ、延期(postpone)、送信しない、などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, ignore, drop, abort, cancel, puncture, rate match, postpone, do not transmit, etc. may be read as interchangeable.

 本開示において、ULチャネル、UL信号、UL送信は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, UL channel, UL signal, and UL transmission may be interpreted as interchangeable.

(無線通信方法)
 UEは、複数のパネルを用いて、1つ以上のUL信号/チャネルを、少なくとも同じ時間ドメイン(例えば、同じ時間リソース/シンボル/スロット/サブスロット)において送信してもよい。以下本開示において、当該送信は、STxMP(動作/スキーム)と呼ばれてもよい。
(Wireless communication method)
A UE may transmit one or more UL signals/channels using multiple panels, at least in the same time domain (e.g., same time resource/symbol/slot/sub-slot), which may be referred to hereinafter in this disclosure as STxMP (operation/scheme).

 本開示の各実施形態において、当該1つ以上のUL信号/チャネルの送信は、単に、UL送信と呼ばれてもよい。 In each embodiment of the present disclosure, the transmission of one or more UL signals/channels may simply be referred to as a UL transmission.

 本開示において、UL送信、STxMP、及びTDM/SDM/SFNを利用(適用)したUL送信は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, UL transmission, STxMP, and UL transmission using (applying) TDM/SDM/SFN may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 本開示において、非対称のUEパネル(非対称パネル/異なるパネル)は、例えば複数のパネル間で、SRSポートの最大数/SRSリソースの最大数/最大ランク/フルパワーモード/コードブックサブセット/コヒーレントタイプ等について異なる能力を有することを意味してよい。一方で、対称のUEパネル(対称パネル/同じパネル)は、複数のパネル間で、SRSポートの最大数/SRSリソースの最大数/最大ランク/フルパワーモード/コードブックサブセット/コヒーレントタイプ等について同じ能力を有することを意味してよい。 In the present disclosure, an asymmetric UE panel (asymmetric panel/different panel) may mean, for example, having different capabilities between multiple panels in terms of maximum number of SRS ports/maximum number of SRS resources/maximum rank/full power mode/codebook subset/coherent type, etc. On the other hand, a symmetric UE panel (symmetric panel/same panel) may mean having the same capabilities between multiple panels in terms of maximum number of SRS ports/maximum number of SRS resources/maximum rank/full power mode/codebook subset/coherent type, etc.

 本開示において、繰り返し送信、及び送信は、互いに読み替えられてよい。 In this disclosure, repeated transmission and transmission may be read as interchangeable.

 本開示において、パネルの切り替えは、ULチャネル/信号をスケジュール/トリガするDCI(スケジューリング/トリガリングDCI)によって指示されてよい。 In the present disclosure, panel switching may be indicated by a DCI (scheduling/triggering DCI) that schedules/triggers an UL channel/signal.

 また、以下の実施形態では、UL送信として主にPUSCH送信を例示するが、UL送信は、その他にPUCCH送信、SRS送信も適用可能である。 In the following embodiment, PUSCH transmission is mainly exemplified as UL transmission, but PUCCH transmission and SRS transmission can also be applied to UL transmission.

<第1の実施形態>
 第1の実施形態は、上述の問題1に関し、複数パネルの組み合わせについて説明する。
First Embodiment
The first embodiment relates to problem 1 above and describes a combination of multiple panels.

 マルチパネルUE(複数のパネルをサポートする/有するUE)は、以下のケース1~6の少なくとも1つをサポートすることができる。 A multi-panel UE (a UE that supports/has multiple panels) can support at least one of the following cases 1 to 6.

(ケース1)
 UEは、複数(例えば3つ)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。各パネルは、他のパネルとは異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、複数のパネルは、互いに非対称パネルであってよい。
(Case 1)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., three) panels, each of which may have different capabilities than the other panels, i.e., the multiple panels may be asymmetric with respect to each other.

 例えば、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、1,2,4であってよい。 For example, the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) may be 1, 2, and 4.

(ケース2)
 UEは、複数(例えば3つ)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。例えば3つのパネルのうち、2つのパネルは同じ能力を有し、他の1つのパネルは、当該2つのパネルとは異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、同じ能力を有する2つのパネルは対称パネルであって、他の1つのパネルは、当該2つのパネルに対して非対称パネルであってよい。
(Case 2)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., three) panels, where two of the three panels may have the same capabilities and the other panel may have a different capability from the two panels, i.e., the two panels with the same capabilities may be symmetric panels and the other panel may be asymmetric with respect to the two panels.

 例えば、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4であってよい。つまり、パネル#0,#1が対称パネルであり、パネル#2が非対称パネルであってよい。 For example, the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) may be 2, 2, and 4. In other words, panels #0 and #1 may be symmetric panels, and panel #2 may be an asymmetric panel.

(ケース3)
 UEは、複数(例えば4つ)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。各パネルは、他のパネルとは異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、複数のパネルは、互いに非対称パネルであってよい。
(Case 3)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., four) panels, each of which may have different capabilities than the other panels, i.e., the multiple panels may be asymmetric with respect to each other.

 例えば、4つのパネル(パネル#0~#3)のそれぞれの能力(SRSポート数/コヒーレントタイプ)は、1ポート、2ポートのコヒーレント送信、4ポートの完全コヒーレント送信、4ポートの部分コヒーレント送信であってよい。ここで、パネル#2とパネル#3とでは、SRSポート数が共に4であるが、コヒーレントタイプが異なる(完全コヒーレント/部分コヒーレント)。このため、パネル#2とパネル#3は、互いに異なる能力を有し、非対称パネルを構成する。 For example, the capabilities (number of SRS ports/coherence type) of each of the four panels (panels #0 to #3) may be one-port or two-port coherent transmission, four-port fully coherent transmission, or four-port partially coherent transmission. Here, panels #2 and #3 both have four SRS ports, but different coherence types (fully coherent/partially coherent). For this reason, panels #2 and #3 have different capabilities and constitute asymmetric panels.

 このように、ケース3では、パネル間でポート数が同じであっても、コヒーレントタイプが異なることによって、非対称パネルを構成する例を示している。 In this way, case 3 shows an example of configuring an asymmetric panel by using different coherent types even if the number of ports is the same between panels.

(ケース4)
 UEは、複数(例えば4つ)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。複数のパネルは、複数のグループに分けられ、グループごとに異なる能力を有してもよい。同じグループ内の各パネルは、同じ能力を有してよい。
(Case 4)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., four) panels, which may be divided into multiple groups with different capabilities, and each panel in the same group may have the same capabilities.

(ケース4-1)
 4つのパネルは、2つのグループ(グループ#0,#1)に分けられてよい。ケース4-1は、1つのグループに2つのパネルが属する例を示す。グループ#0に属する2つのパネル(パネル#0,#1)は、同じ能力を有してよい。グループ#1に属する2つのパネル(パネル#2,#3)は、同じ能力を有してよい。ここで、グループ#0とグループ#1は、異なる能力を有する。
(Case 4-1)
The four panels may be divided into two groups (groups #0 and #1). Case 4-1 shows an example in which two panels belong to one group. The two panels (panels #0 and #1) belonging to group #0 may have the same capabilities. The two panels (panels #2 and #3) belonging to group #1 may have the same capabilities. Here, groups #0 and #1 have different capabilities.

 例えば、4つのパネル(パネル#0~#3)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4,4であってよい。つまり、この例では、同じポート数(2つ)を有するパネル#0,#1が互いに対称パネルであり、同じポート数(4つ)を有するパネル#2,#3が互いに対称パネルである。一方でパネル#0/#1(グループ#0)とパネル#2/#3(グループ#1)は互いに非対称パネルである。 For example, the number of SRS ports on each of the four panels (panels #0 to #3) may be 2, 2, 4, and 4. That is, in this example, panels #0 and #1, which have the same number of ports (2), are symmetrical panels, and panels #2 and #3, which have the same number of ports (4), are symmetrical panels. On the other hand, panels #0/#1 (group #0) and panels #2/#3 (group #1) are asymmetrical panels.

(ケース4-2)
 4つのパネルは、2つのグループ(グループ#0,#1)に分けられてよい。ケース4-2は、1つのグループ#0に3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)が属し、他の1つのグループ#1に1つのパネル#3が属する例を示す。グループ#0に属する3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)は、同じ能力を有してよい。ここで、グループ#0とグループ#1は、異なる能力を有する。
(Case 4-2)
The four panels may be divided into two groups (groups #0 and #1). Case 4-2 shows an example in which three panels (panels #0 to #2) belong to one group #0, and one panel #3 belongs to the other group #1. The three panels (panels #0 to #2) belonging to group #0 may have the same capabilities. Here, groups #0 and #1 have different capabilities.

 例えば、4つのパネル(パネル#0~#3)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,2,4であってよい。つまり、この例では、同じポート数(2つ)を有するパネル#0,#1,#2が互いに対称パネルである。一方でパネル#0/#1/#2(グループ#0)とパネル#3(グループ#1)は互いに非対称パネルである。 For example, the number of SRS ports on each of the four panels (panels #0 to #3) may be 2, 2, 2, and 4. That is, in this example, panels #0, #1, and #2, which have the same number of ports (2), are symmetrical panels. On the other hand, panels #0/#1/#2 (group #0) and panel #3 (group #1) are asymmetrical panels.

(ケース5)
 UEは、複数(例えばM個)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。M個のパネルは、複数(例えばN個)のグループに分けられてよい。ここで、N≦Mであってよい。各グループは、互いに異なる能力を有してもよい。同じグループ内の各パネルは、同じ能力を有してよい。つまり、パネルは、異なるグループ間では異なる能力を有し、同じグループ内では同じ能力を有してよい。言い換えると、パネルは、異なるグループ間では非対称パネルを構成し、同じグループ内では対称パネルを構成してよい。
(Case 5)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions between multiple (e.g., M) panels. The M panels may be divided into multiple (e.g., N) groups, where N may be less than or equal to M. Each group may have different capabilities. Each panel in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, the panels may have different capabilities between different groups and the same capabilities within the same group. In other words, the panels may constitute asymmetric panels between different groups and symmetric panels within the same group.

(ケース6)
 UEは、複数(例えばM個)のパネル間でUL送信の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。M個のパネルは、全て同じ能力を有してよい。すなわち、M個のパネルは、互いに対称パネルを構成してよい。
(Case 6)
The UE may be instructed to dynamically switch UL transmissions among multiple (e.g., M) panels, all of which may have the same capabilities, i.e., the M panels may be symmetrical to one another.

 以上説明した第1の実施形態によれば、複数のパネルが適用される複数のケースを明確に区別/分類することができる。 According to the first embodiment described above, it is possible to clearly distinguish/classify multiple cases in which multiple panels are applied.

<第2の実施形態>
 第2の実施形態は、上述の問題1に関し、複数パネルを利用したUL送信スキームについて説明する。
Second Embodiment
The second embodiment relates to problem 1 above and describes a UL transmission scheme utilizing multiple panels.

 第2の実施形態は、実施形態2-1~2-3に大別される。実施形態2-1~2-3はそれぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 The second embodiment is broadly divided into embodiments 2-1 to 2-3. Each of the embodiments 2-1 to 2-3 may be applied alone or in combination.

《実施形態2-1》
 実施形態2-1は、TDMを利用したPUSCH繰り返し送信に関する。
<<Embodiment 2-1>>
The embodiment 2-1 relates to repeated transmission of a PUSCH using TDM.

 シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいて、PUSCH繰り返し送信(シングルDCI マルチTRP TDM PUSCH repetition)が特定の上位レイヤシグナリングによって有効になっている場合、UEは、M個(M>2)のパネル間において、以下に示すUL送信スキーム(2-1-1~2-1-4)の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。 In single DCI-based multi-TRP, when PUSCH repetition transmission (single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repetition) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-1-1 to 2-1-4) between M (M>2) panels.

(2-1-1)
・M個のパネルのうち1つのパネルを利用したシングルTRP シングルパネル PUSCH送信。
(2-1-1)
- Single TRP single panel PUSCH transmission using one of M panels.

 当該1つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルであってよい。また、1つに限らず、M個のパネルの中からいくつか(複数)のパネルが選択されてもよい。 The one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.

(2-1-2)
・M個のパネルのうち2つのパネルを利用したマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信。
(2-1-2)
- Multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeated transmission using two of M panels.

 異なるPUSCH繰り返し送信は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。当該2つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルのペア(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,2)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、2は1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 Different PUSCH repeat transmissions may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs. The two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels. In this case, the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.

 当該マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、パネル/TRP順序(order)の動的な切り替えがサポートされてよい。例えば、2つのパネル(パネル#1,#2)を利用するマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信において、最初(第1)のPUSCH繰り返し送信は、パネル#1/#2に関連付けられてよい。 In the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported. For example, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission using two panels (panels #1 and #2), the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with panel #1/#2.

(2-1-3)
・M個のパネルのうちX個(2<X<M)のパネルを利用したマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信。
(2-1-3)
- Multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeated transmission using X panels (2<X<M) out of M panels.

 異なるPUSCH繰り返し送信は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。当該X個のパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルグループ(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。つまり、X個のパネルを含む任意のパネル群が、M個のパネルの中から選択されてよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,X)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、Xは1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 Different PUSCH repeat transmissions may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs. The X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from among the M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from among the M panels. In this case, the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more panel groups may be selected.

 当該マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、パネル/TRP順序(order)の動的な切り替えがサポートされてよい。例えば、X個のパネル(パネル#1~#X)を利用するマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信において、最初(第1)のPUSCH繰り返し送信は、パネル#1~#Xの少なくとも1つに関連付けられてよい。 In the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported. For example, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission using X panels (panels #1 to #X), the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with at least one of panels #1 to #X.

(2-1-4)
・M個のパネルの全てを利用したマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信。
(2-1-4)
- Multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeated transmission utilizing all M panels.

 異なるPUSCH繰り返し送信は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。 Different PUSCH repeat transmissions may be sent from different panels to different TRPs.

 当該マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、パネル/TRP順序(order)の動的な切り替えがサポートされてよい。例えば、M個のパネル(パネル#1~#M)を利用するマルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信において、最初(第1)のPUSCH繰り返し送信は、パネル#1~#Mの少なくとも1つに関連付けられてよい。 In the multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, dynamic switching of panel/TRP order may be supported. For example, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission using M panels (panels #1 to #M), the first PUSCH repeat transmission may be associated with at least one of panels #1 to #M.

 実施形態2-1によれば、TDMを利用したPUSCH繰り返し送信において、特定のケースごとのUL送信スキームを適切に区別することができる。 According to embodiment 2-1, in PUSCH repeated transmission using TDM, it is possible to appropriately distinguish between UL transmission schemes for each specific case.

《実施形態2-2》
 実施形態2-2は、SDMを利用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信に関する。
<<Embodiment 2-2>>
The embodiment 2-2 relates to simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SDM.

 シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいて、SDMを適用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信(シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCHスキーム)が特定の上位レイヤシグナリングによって有効になっている場合、UEは、M個(M>2)のパネル間において、以下に示すUL送信スキーム(2-2-1~2-2-4)の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。 In single DCI-based multi-TRP, when simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission with SDM (single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH scheme) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-2-1 to 2-2-4) between M (M>2) panels.

(2-2-1)
・M個のパネルのうち1つのパネルを利用したシングルTRP シングルパネル PUSCH送信。
(2-2-1)
- Single TRP single panel PUSCH transmission using one of M panels.

 当該1つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルであってよい。また、1つに限らず、M個のパネルの中からいくつか(複数)のパネルが選択されてもよい。 The one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.

(2-2-2)
・M個のパネルのうち2つのパネルを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCH送信。
(2-2-2)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH transmission using two panels out of M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの異なるレイヤ(different layer of a PUSCH)は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。当該2つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルのペア(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,2)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、2は1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 Different layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs. The two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels. In this case, the total number C of candidates for the panel group may be represented as C(M, 2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.

(2-2-3)
・M個のパネルのうちX個(2<X<M)のパネルを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCH送信。
(2-2-3)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH transmission using X panels (2<X<M) out of M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの異なるレイヤ(different layer of a PUSCH)は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。当該X個のパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルグループ(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。つまり、X個のパネルを含む任意のパネル群が、M個のパネルの中から選択されてよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,X)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、Xは1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 Different layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs. The X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from among the M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from among the M panels. In this case, the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.

(2-2-4)
・M個のパネルの全てを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCH送信。
(2-2-4)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH transmission utilizing all M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの異なるレイヤ(different layer of a PUSCH)は、異なるパネルから異なるTRPに向けて送信されてよい。 Different layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from different panels to different TRPs.

 実施形態2-2によれば、SDMを利用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信において、特定のケースごとのUL送信スキームを適切に区別することができる。 According to embodiment 2-2, in simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SDM, it is possible to appropriately distinguish between UL transmission schemes for each specific case.

《実施形態2-3》
 実施形態2-3は、SFMを利用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信に関する。
<<Embodiment 2-3>>
Embodiment 2-3 relates to simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SFM.

 シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいて、SFNを適用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信(シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCHスキーム)が特定の上位レイヤシグナリングによって有効になっている場合、UEは、M個(M>2)のパネル間において、以下に示すUL送信スキーム(2-3-1~2-3-4)の動的な切り替えを指示されてもよい。 In single DCI-based multi-TRP, when simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission with SFN (single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH scheme) is enabled by specific higher layer signaling, the UE may be instructed to dynamically switch between the following UL transmission schemes (2-3-1 to 2-3-4) between M (M>2) panels.

(2-3-1)
・M個のパネルのうち1つのパネルを利用したシングルTRP シングルパネル PUSCH送信。
(2-3-1)
- Single TRP single panel PUSCH transmission using one of M panels.

 当該1つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルであってよい。また、1つに限らず、M個のパネルの中からいくつか(複数)のパネルが選択されてもよい。 The one panel may be any panel selected from the M number of panels. Furthermore, it is not limited to one panel, and several (multiple) panels may be selected from the M number of panels.

(2-3-2)
・M個のパネルのうち2つのパネルを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCH送信。
(2-3-2)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission using two panels out of M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの全てのレイヤ(all layers of a PUSCH)は、2つのパネルから送信されてよい。当該2つのパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルのペア(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,2)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、2は1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from two panels. The two panels may be any pair of panels (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels. In this case, the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M, 2), where M represents the total number of panels and 2 represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more panel groups may be selected.

(2-3-3)
・M個のパネルのうちX個(2<X<M)のパネルを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCH送信。
(2-3-3)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission using X panels (2<X<M) out of M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの全てのレイヤ(all layers of a PUSCH)は、X個のパネルから送信されてよい。当該X個のパネルは、M個のパネルの中から選択された任意のパネルグループ(パネル群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。つまり、X個のパネルを含む任意のパネル群が、M個のパネルの中から選択されてよい。この場合、パネル群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,X)で表されてよい。ここでMはパネルの総数を表し、Xは1つのパネル群当たりのパネル数を表してよい。 All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from X panels. The X panels may be any panel group (which may be called a panel group) selected from M panels. That is, any panel group including X panels may be selected from M panels. In this case, the total number C of panel group candidates may be represented as C(M,X), where M represents the total number of panels and X represents the number of panels per panel group.

 また、選択され得るパネル群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のパネル群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of panel groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of panel groups greater than or equal to two may be selected.

(2-3-4)
・M個のパネルの全てを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCH送信。
(2-3-4)
- Single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission utilizing all M panels.

 1つのPUSCHの全てのレイヤ(all layers of a PUSCH)は、M個のパネルから送信されてよい。 All layers of a PUSCH may be transmitted from M panels.

 実施形態2-3によれば、SFNを利用した同時マルチパネルPUSCH送信において、特定のケースごとのUL送信スキームを適切に区別することができる。 According to embodiment 2-3, in simultaneous multi-panel PUSCH transmission using SFN, it is possible to appropriately distinguish the UL transmission scheme for each specific case.

《具体例》
 図9から図14を参照して第2の実施形態の具体例について説明する。図9から図14では、パネルが3つ(つまりM=3)の場合について説明するが、これに限定されない。パネル数は、2又は4以上であってもよい。
<<Example>>
A specific example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 9 to Fig. 14. Although a case where there are three panels (i.e., M=3) will be described in Fig. 9 to Fig. 14, the number of panels is not limited to three. The number of panels may be two or four or more.

《シングルTRP シングルパネル送信》
 図9A-図9Cは、シングルTRP シングルパネル送信の一例を示す図である。図9は、上述したUL送信スキーム2-1-1/2-2-1/2-3-1に対応する。また、図9では、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのポート数が、2,2,4である場合について説明するが、これに限定されない。各パネルのポート数は適宜変更が可能である。
"Single TRP Single Panel Transmission"
9A-9C are diagrams showing an example of single TRP single panel transmission. FIG. 9 corresponds to the above-mentioned UL transmission scheme 2-1-1/2-2-1/2-3-1. Also, in FIG. 9, the case where the number of ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4 is described, but this is not limited thereto. The number of ports of each panel can be changed as appropriate.

 図9Aに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#0を選択し、当該パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 9A, the UE may select panel #0 from among the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #0.

 図9Bに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#1を選択し、当該パネル#1からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 9B, the UE may select panel #1 from among the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #1 toward TRP #0.

 図9Cに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#2を選択し、当該パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 9C, the UE may select panel #2 from the three panels and perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #1.

 なお、UEは、パネル#0/#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。また、UEは、パネル#2からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。 The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0/#1 to TRP #1. The UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #0.

《2つのパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信》
 図10A-図10Cは、2つのパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信の一例を示す図である。図10は、上述したUL送信スキーム2-1-2/2-2-2/2-3-2に対応する。また、図10の各パネルのポート数は、図9と同様である。
<<Multi-TRP using two panels, multi-panel transmission>>
Figures 10A-10C show an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using two panels. Figure 10 corresponds to the UL transmission scheme 2-1-2/2-2-2/2-3-2 described above. Also, the number of ports on each panel in Figure 10 is the same as in Figure 9.

 図10Aに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#0,#1を選択してよい。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 10A, the UE may select panels #0 and #1 from among the three panels. The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.

 図10Bに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#0,#2を選択してよい。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 10B, the UE may select panels #0 and #2 from among the three panels. The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.

 図10Cに示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#1,#2を選択してよい。UEは、パネル#1からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 10C, the UE may select panels #1 and #2 from among the three panels. The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #0, and may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.

 なお、UEは、パネル#0からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。また、UEは、パネル#2からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。つまり、各パネルからのUL送信は、互いに異なるTRPに向けて行われることが好ましい。 The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #1. The UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #0. In other words, it is preferable that UL transmission from each panel is performed toward a different TRP.

《3つ(全て)のパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信》
 図11は、3つ(全て)のパネルを利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル送信の一例を示す図である。図11は、上述したUL送信スキーム2-1-3/2-2-3/2-3-3/2-1-4/2-2-4/2-3-4に対応する。また、図10の各パネルのポート数は、図9と同様である。
<<Multi-TRP using all three panels (multi-panel transmission)>>
Figure 11 shows an example of multi-TRP multi-panel transmission using three (all) panels. Figure 11 corresponds to the UL transmission scheme 2-1-3/2-2-3/2-3-3/2-1-4/2-2-4/2-3-4 described above. Also, the number of ports on each panel in Figure 10 is the same as in Figure 9.

 図11に示すように、UEは、3つのパネルの中からパネル#0,#1,#2(3つ/全てのパネル)を選択してよい。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#2からTRP#2に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 As shown in FIG. 11, the UE may select panels #0, #1, and #2 (all three panels) from among the three panels. The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.

 なお、UEは、パネル#0からTRP#1/#2に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。また、UEは、パネル#1からTRP#0/#2に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。また、UEは、パネル#2からTRP#0/#1に向けてUL送信を行ってもよい。つまり、各パネルからのUL送信は、互いに異なるTRPに向けて行われることが好ましい。 The UE may perform UL transmission from panel #0 toward TRP #1/#2. The UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #1 toward TRP #0/#2. The UE may also perform UL transmission from panel #2 toward TRP #0/#1. In other words, it is preferable that UL transmission from each panel is performed toward a different TRP.

《UL送信スキームのパターン》
 図12から図14を参照して、動的な切り替えをサポートするUL送信スキームのパターンについて説明する。図12から図14では、3つのパネル(パネル#1~#3)のケースを例示するが、パネル数はこれに限定されず適宜変更が可能である。また、図12から図14では、パネルインデックス(ID)が#1~#3で示されているが、パネルインデックスは、#0~#2で読み替えられてもよい。
<UL transmission scheme pattern>
A pattern of a UL transmission scheme that supports dynamic switching will be described with reference to Figures 12 to 14. Although a case of three panels (panels #1 to #3) is illustrated in Figures 12 to 14, the number of panels is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Also, although panel indexes (IDs) are shown as #1 to #3 in Figures 12 to 14, the panel indexes may be read as #0 to #2.

 図12は、TDMを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。図12に示すように、TDMを利用したUL送信スキームは、例えば以下のパターンを例示できる:
・1つのパネル#1/#2/#3を利用したシングルTRP シングルパネル送信。
・2つのパネル#1,#2を利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル TDM繰り返し送信(第1の繰り返し送信は、パネル#1/#2に関連付けられる)。
・2つのパネル#1,#3を利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル TDM繰り返し送信(第1の繰り返し送信は、パネル#1/#3に関連付けられる)。
・2つのパネル#2,#3を利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル TDM繰り返し送信(第1の繰り返し送信は、パネル#2/#3に関連付けられる)。
・3つのパネル#1~#3を利用したマルチTRP マルチパネル TDM繰り返し送信(第1の繰り返し送信は、パネル#1/#2/#3に関連付けられる)。
12 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using TDM. As shown in FIG. 12, the UL transmission scheme using TDM can be exemplified by the following patterns:
- Single TRP single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3.
- Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #1 and #2 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#2).
- Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #1 and #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#3).
- Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using two panels #2 and #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #2/#3).
- Multi-TRP multi-panel TDM repeat transmission using three panels #1 to #3 (the first repeat transmission is associated with panel #1/#2/#3).

 図12に示すUL送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、図12の一部(subset)がサポートされてもよい。 All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 12 may not be supported, and only a subset of the schemes shown in FIG. 12 may be supported.

 図13は、SDMを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。図13に示すように、SDMを利用したUL送信スキームは、例えば以下のパターンを例示できる:
・1つのパネル#1/#2/#3を利用したシングルパネル送信。
・2つのパネル#1,#2を利用したSTxMP SDM送信。
・2つのパネル#1,#3を利用したSTxMP SDM送信。
・2つのパネル#2,#3を利用したSTxMP SDM送信。
・3つのパネル#1~#3を利用したSTxMP SDM送信。
13 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SDM. As shown in FIG. 13, the UL transmission scheme using SDM can be exemplified by the following patterns:
- Single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3.
-STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #1 and #2.
-STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #1 and #3.
-STxMP SDM transmission using two panels #2 and #3.
-STxMP SDM transmission using three panels #1 to #3.

 図13に示すUL送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、図13の一部(subset)がサポートされてもよい。 All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 13 may not be supported, and only a subset of the schemes shown in FIG. 13 may be supported.

 図14は、SFNを利用したUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。図14に示すように、SFNを利用したUL送信スキームは、例えば以下のパターンを例示できる:
・1つのパネル#1/#2/#3を利用したシングルパネル送信。
・2つのパネル#1,#2を利用したSTxMP SFN送信。
・2つのパネル#1,#3を利用したSTxMP SFN送信。
・2つのパネル#2,#3を利用したSTxMP SFN送信。
・3つのパネル#1~#3を利用したSTxMP SFN送信。
14 is a diagram showing a pattern of a UL transmission scheme using SFN. As shown in FIG. 14, the UL transmission scheme using SFN can be exemplified by the following patterns:
- Single panel transmission using one panel #1/#2/#3.
-STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #1 and #2.
-STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #1 and #3.
-STxMP SFN transmission using two panels #2 and #3.
-STxMP SFN transmission using three panels #1 to #3.

 図14に示すUL送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、図14の一部(subset)がサポートされてもよい。 All of the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 14 may not be supported, and only a subset of FIG. 14 may be supported.

 以上説明した第2の実施形態によれば、複数のパネルが適用されるUL送信スキームを明確に区別/分類することができる。 According to the second embodiment described above, UL transmission schemes to which multiple panels are applied can be clearly distinguished/classified.

<第3の実施形態>
 第3の実施形態は、上述の問題1に関し、複数のパネルが適用されるUL送信スキームの切り替え方法について説明する。第3の実施形態では、パネル数Mが2より大きいケース(例えば3)におけるパネル間の動的切り替えを例示する。以下で説明するパネル/TRP/SRSポートの数は、あくまで例示であり、適宜変更が可能である。
Third Embodiment
The third embodiment describes a method for switching UL transmission schemes to which multiple panels are applied, with respect to the above-mentioned problem 1. The third embodiment illustrates dynamic switching between panels in a case where the number of panels M is greater than 2 (e.g., 3). The numbers of panels/TRP/SRS ports described below are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

 第3の実施形態は、実施形態3-1~3-3に大別される。実施形態3-1~3-3はそれぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 The third embodiment is broadly divided into embodiments 3-1 to 3-3. Each of the embodiments 3-1 to 3-3 may be applied alone or in combination.

《実施形態3-1》
 1つのSRSリソースセットは、ネットワーク(NW)からの動的な指示に基づいて、異なるパネルに対して異なるパラメータ(例えば、SRSポート数、他のパネル固有のパラメータ等)を適用することができる。
<<Embodiment 3-1>>
One SRS resource set can apply different parameters (eg, number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) to different panels based on dynamic instructions from the network (NW).

 1つのSRSリソースセットは、複数のパネルに対して複数のパラメータ(例えば、SRSポート数、他のパネル固有のパラメータ等)のセットを準静的に設定されてよい。この場合、NWは、SRSリソースセットとパネルの間の関連付けを動的に指示/更新してもよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて更新されたパラメータのセットを1つのSRSリソースセットに適用してよい。 One SRS resource set may be semi-statically configured with a set of multiple parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) for multiple panels. In this case, the NW may dynamically instruct/update the association between the SRS resource set and the panel. The UE may apply the updated set of parameters to one SRS resource set based on the instruction.

 また、1つのSRSリソースのパラメータは、NWによって動的に指示/更新されてよい。 Furthermore, the parameters of one SRS resource may be dynamically instructed/updated by the NW.

《具体例》
 図15は、実施形態3-1に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。図15に示すように、パネル切り替えの前において、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4である。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行う。
<<Example>>
Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-1. As shown in Fig. 15, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.

 ここで、SRSリソースセット#0は、上述のパラメータとして2ポートのSRSリソース(2つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#0は、パネル#0に関連付けられている。 Here, SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters. SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.

 同様に、SRSリソースセット#1は、パラメータとして2ポートのSRSリソース(2つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#1は、パネル#1に関連付けられている。 Similarly, SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as parameters. SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.

 例えば、UEは、パネル切り替え(パネル#1からパネル#2に切り替える旨)の指示をNWから受信してよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて、SRSリソースセット#1のSRSポート数を、2から4に更新してよい。また、UEは、更新されたSRSリソースセット#1(SRSポート数)を適用し、当該SRSリソースセット#1とパネルとの関連付けをパネル#1からパネル#2に更新してよい。 For example, the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #1 from 2 to 4. The UE may also apply the updated SRS resource set #1 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #1 and the panel from panel #1 to panel #2.

 UEは、更新されたSRSリソースセット#1とパネル#2との関連付けに基づき、パネル切り替え後は、パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 Based on the updated association between SRS resource set #1 and panel #2, after panel switching, the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1.

 このように、図15に示す実施形態3-1では、パネル切り替えの際、SRSリソースセットのインデックスはそのまま維持しつつ、当該SRSリソースセットに対応するパラメータを更新し、当該SRSリソースセットに関連付くパネルに切り替える例を示している。 In this way, in embodiment 3-1 shown in FIG. 15, when switching panels, the index of the SRS resource set is maintained as is, but the parameters corresponding to that SRS resource set are updated, and the panel is switched to that associated with that SRS resource set.

《注記》
 実施形態3-1では、シングルDCI マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信/シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCH送信/シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCH送信において、2つのパネル/TRPをサポートするために、2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてもよい。
Notes:
In embodiment 3-1, in single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeated transmission/single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH transmission/single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission, two CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured to support two panels/TRPs.

 また、シングルDCI マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信/シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDM PUSCH送信/シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFN PUSCH送信において、2より大きいX個のパネル/TRPをサポートするために、X個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてもよい。 Also, in single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeated transmission/single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM PUSCH transmission/single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN PUSCH transmission, an SRS resource set of X CBs/NCBs may be configured to support X panels/TRPs, which is greater than 2.

 本開示において、X個のパネル/TRPを利用したシングルDCI マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信は、複数の繰り返し送信がX個のパネル/TRPに関連付けられ、異なる繰り返し送信が異なるパネル/TRPに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 In this disclosure, a single DCI multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission utilizing X panels/TRPs may mean that multiple repeat transmissions are associated with X panels/TRPs, with different repeat transmissions associated with different panels/TRPs.

 本開示において、シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SDMは、1つのPUSCHの複数のレイヤがX個のパネル/TRPに関連付けられ、異なるレイヤが異なるパネル/TRPに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 In this disclosure, single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SDM may mean that multiple layers of one PUSCH are associated with X panels/TRPs, with different layers associated with different panels/TRPs.

 本開示において、シングルDCI マルチTRP STxMP SFNは、1つのPUSCHの全てのレイヤがX個のパネル/TRPに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 In this disclosure, single DCI multi-TRP STxMP SFN may mean that all layers of one PUSCH are associated with X panels/TRPs.

《実施形態3-2》 《Embodiment 3-2》

 実施形態3-2では、M個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてもよい。各SRSリソースセットは、あるパネルに対応してよい。上述したUL送信スキーム間の動的な切り替えを指示するために、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(フィールド/特定のフィールドと呼ばれてもよい)が利用されてよい。当該特定のフィールドは、例えばDCIに含まれてよく、以下のオプション1~4の少なくとも1つを指示してもよい。以下のオプション1~4は、PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセットとの関連付けが指示されることを意味してよい。 In embodiment 3-2, M CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured. Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel. To indicate dynamic switching between the above-mentioned UL transmission schemes, an SRS resource set indicator field (which may be referred to as a field/specific field) may be used. The specific field may be included in, for example, a DCI and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 4. The following options 1 to 4 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set is indicated.

 本開示において、「PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセットとが関連付けられること」、及び「あるSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースを選択すること」は、互いに読み替えられてよい。 In this disclosure, "associating a PUSCH transmission with a certain SRS resource set" and "selecting a certain SRS resource set/SRS resource" may be interpreted as interchangeable.

《オプション1》
 PUSCH送信は、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。選択される1つのSRSリソースセットは、M個のSRSリソースセットの中の任意のSRSリソースセットであってよい。また、選択されるSRSリソースセットは、1つに限らず、いくつかのSRSリソースセットであってよい。
Option 1
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource set selected from the M SRS resource sets. The selected one SRS resource set may be any SRS resource set among the M SRS resource sets. Also, the selected SRS resource set is not limited to one, and may be several SRS resource sets.

《オプション2》
 PUSCH送信は、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される2つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。当該2つのSRSリソースセットは、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択された任意のSRSリソースセットのペア(SRSリソースセット群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。この場合、SRSリソースセット群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,2)で表されてよい。ここでMはSRSリソースセットの総数を表し、2は1つのSRSリソースセット群当たりのSRSリソースセット数を表してよい。
Option 2
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from among the M SRS resource sets. The two SRS resource sets may be any pair of SRS resource sets (which may be referred to as an SRS resource set group) selected from among the M SRS resource sets. In this case, the total number C of candidates for the SRS resource set group may be represented as C(M, 2), where M may represent the total number of SRS resource sets and 2 may represent the number of SRS resource sets per SRS resource set group.

 また、選択され得るSRSリソースセット群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のSRSリソースセット群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of SRS resource set groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more SRS resource set groups may be selected.

 また、マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、第1の繰り返し送信がどのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられているかを指示してもよい。 Also, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.

《オプション3》
 PUSCH送信は、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択されるX個(2<X<M)のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。当該X個のSRSリソースセットは、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択された任意のSRSリソースセットグループ(SRSリソースセット群と呼ばれてもよい)であってよい。この場合、SRSリソースセット群の候補の総数Cは、C(M,X)で表されてよい。ここでMはSRSリソースセットの総数を表し、Xは1つのSRSリソースセット群当たりのSRSリソースセット数を表してよい。
Option 3
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2<X<M) SRS resource sets selected from among the M SRS resource sets. The X SRS resource sets may be any SRS resource set group (which may be referred to as an SRS resource set group) selected from among the M SRS resource sets. In this case, the total number C of candidates for the SRS resource set group may be represented as C(M,X), where M may represent the total number of SRS resource sets and X may represent the number of SRS resource sets per SRS resource set group.

 また、選択され得るSRSリソースセット群の数は、1に限らず、2以上の任意(いくつか)のSRSリソースセット群が選択されてもよい。 In addition, the number of SRS resource set groups that can be selected is not limited to one, and any number (several) of two or more SRS resource set groups may be selected.

 また、マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、第1の繰り返し送信がどのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられているかを指示してもよい。 Also, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.

《オプション4》
 PUSCH送信は、M個の全てのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。
Option 4:
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with all M SRS resource sets.

 また、マルチTRP TDM PUSCH繰り返し送信では、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、第1の繰り返し送信がどのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられているかを指示してもよい。 Also, in a multi-TRP TDM PUSCH repeat transmission, the SRS resource set indicator field may indicate which SRS resource set the first repeat transmission is associated with.

《変形例》
 上述したSRSリソースセットの選択は、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えばRRC/MAC CE)によって設定/指示されてもよい。具体的には、先ず、L個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットがRRCによって設定され、L個のSRSリソースセットの中からM個のSRSリソースセットがMAC CEによって指示/選択されてもよい。ここでMは2以上の整数であってよく、LはM以上の整数であってよい。このように、選択されるSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)数を上位レイヤシグナリングによって段階的に絞っていくことにより、UEは適切にSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)を選択することができ、さらにはUE/NWの処理負荷を削減することが可能である。
<<Variation>>
The above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE). Specifically, first, the SRS resource sets of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and M SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE. Here, M may be an integer of 2 or more, and L may be an integer of M or more. In this way, by gradually narrowing down the number of SRS resource sets (SRS resources) to be selected by upper layer signaling, the UE can appropriately select the SRS resource set (SRS resource), and further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the UE/NW.

《具体例》
 図16は、実施形態3-2に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。図16に示すように、パネル切り替えの前において、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4である。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行う。
<<Example>>
Fig. 16 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-2. As shown in Fig. 16, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.

 ここで、SRSリソースセット#0は、上述のパラメータとして2ポートのSRSリソース(2つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#0は、パネル#0に関連付けられている。 Here, SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters. SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.

 同様に、SRSリソースセット#1は、パラメータとして2ポートのSRSリソース(2つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#1は、パネル#1に関連付けられている。 Similarly, SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as parameters. SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.

 例えば、UEは、パネル切り替え(パネル#1からパネル#2に切り替える旨)の指示をNWから受信してよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて、SRSリソースセットをSRSリソースセット#1からSRSリソースセット#2に切り替えてよい。ここで、SRSリソースセット#2は、パネル#2に関連付けられてよい。 For example, the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may switch the SRS resource set from SRS resource set #1 to SRS resource set #2. Here, SRS resource set #2 may be associated with panel #2.

 UEは、切り替えられたSRSリソースセット#2とパネル#2との関連付けに基づき、パネル切り替え後は、パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 After the panel switching, the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1 based on the association between the switched SRS resource set #2 and panel #2.

 このように、図16に示す実施形態3-2では、切り替え前のパネル#1に対応するSRSリソースセット#1を、切り替え先のパネル#2に対応するSRSリソースセット#2に切り替えることで、パネル切り替えを実現する例を示している。 In this way, embodiment 3-2 shown in FIG. 16 shows an example in which panel switching is achieved by switching SRS resource set #1 corresponding to panel #1 before switching to SRS resource set #2 corresponding to panel #2 at the switching destination.

 図17から図19は、実施形態3-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。なお、図17から図19に示すコードポイントとUL送信スキームの対応付け(組み合わせ)は、変更されてもよい(並べ替えられてもよい)。また、SRSリソースセットの1st/2nd/3rd/4thは、SRSリソースセットの順序に基づいて並べ替えられてもよい。また、図17から図19に示す特定のPUSCH(UL)送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、各図ともそれぞれの一部のみがサポートされてもよい。 FIGS. 17 to 19 are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-2. The correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 may be changed (rearranged). Also, the 1st/2nd/3rd/4th SRS resource sets may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource sets. Also, it is not necessary for all of the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 to be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.

 図17は、3つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd/3rd)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。特定のコードポイントは、3ビットのフィールド値で特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 FIG. 17 shows an example in which at least one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. A specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set using a 3-bit field value.

 例えば、コードポイント000/001/010は、PUSCH送信が3つのSRSリソースセットのうちの1つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント011/100/101/110は、PUSCH送信が3つのSRSリソースセットのうちの2つと関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント111は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 For example, code points 000/001/010 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of three SRS resource sets. Code points 011/100/101/110 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of three SRS resource sets. The remaining code point 111 may be reserved.

 図18は、4つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd/3rd/4th)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。特定のコードポイントは、0~15の値を用いて特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 FIG. 18 shows an example in which at least one of four SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. A specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set using a value from 0 to 15.

 例えば、コードポイント0~3は、PUSCH送信が4つのSRSリソースセットのうちの1つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント4~9は、PUSCH送信が4つのSRSリソースセットのうちの2つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント10~13は、PUSCH送信が4つのSRSリソースセットのうちの3つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント14は、PUSCH送信が4つのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント15は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 For example, code points 0-3 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of four SRS resource sets. Code points 4-9 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of four SRS resource sets. Code points 10-13 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with three of four SRS resource sets. Code point 14 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with four SRS resource sets. The remaining code point 15 may be Reserved.

 図19は、3つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd/3rd)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信(例えばTDMを利用したPUSCH繰り返し送信)に関連付けられる例を示している。特定のコードポイントは、0~15の値を用いて特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 FIG. 19 shows an example in which at least one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission (e.g., PUSCH repeated transmission using TDM). A specific code point may indicate an association between a specific PUSCH transmission and an SRS resource set using a value from 0 to 15.

 例えば、コードポイント0~2は、PUSCH送信が3つのSRSリソースセットのうちの1つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント3~8は、PUSCH送信が3つのSRSリソースセットのうちの2つと関連付けられ、第1の繰り返し送信が当該2つのうちの1つと関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント9~11は、PUSCH送信スキームが3つのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられ、第1の繰り返し送信が当該3つのうちの1つと関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント12~15は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 For example, code points 0-2 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one of three SRS resource sets. Code points 3-8 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two of three SRS resource sets, with the first repeat transmission associated with one of the two. Code points 9-11 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission scheme is associated with three SRS resource sets, with the first repeat transmission associated with one of the three. The remaining code points 12-15 may be reserved.

《実施形態3-3》
 実施形態3-3は、CBのPUSCHにのみ適用されてもよく、NCBのPUSCHには適用されなくてもよい。
<<Embodiment 3-3>>
Embodiment 3-3 may be applied only to the CB's PUSH and may not be applied to the NCB's PUSH.

 実施形態3-3では、M個のパネルがN個のグループに分割されるケースを想定する(NはM以下であってよい)。同じグループ内のパネルは、同じ能力を有してよい。すなわち、同じグループに属するパネルは、互いに対称パネルを構成してよい。また、異なるグループ同士は、異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、グループを跨ぐパネル同士は、互いに非対称パネルを構成してよい。 In embodiment 3-3, a case is assumed in which M panels are divided into N groups (N may be equal to or less than M). Panels in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, panels belonging to the same group may form symmetrical panels. Also, different groups may have different capabilities. That is, panels across groups may form asymmetrical panels.

 また、分割されたグループ数に対応したN個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。各SRSリソースセットは、同じ能力を有するパネルグループ(パネル群)に対応してよい。すなわち、上述のグループとパネルグループは、互いに読み替えられてよい。 Furthermore, N CB/NCB SRS resource sets corresponding to the number of divided groups may be set. Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel group (panel group) having the same capabilities. In other words, the above-mentioned groups and panel groups may be read as interchangeable.

 上述したように、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(フィールド/特定のフィールドと呼ばれてもよい)は、UL送信スキーム間の動的切り替えを指示するために利用されてよい。SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、例えばDCIに含まれてよく、以下のオプション1~6の少なくとも1つを指示してもよい。以下のオプション1~6は、PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)との関連付けが指示されることを意味してよい。 As mentioned above, the SRS resource set indicator field (which may also be referred to as a field/specific field) may be utilized to indicate dynamic switching between UL transmission schemes. The SRS resource set indicator field may be included in the DCI, for example, and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 6. The following options 1 to 6 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set (SRS resource) is indicated.

 本開示において、「PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセットとが関連付けられること」、及び「あるSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースを選択すること」は、互いに読み替えられてよい。 In this disclosure, "associating a PUSCH transmission with a certain SRS resource set" and "selecting a certain SRS resource set/SRS resource" may be interpreted as interchangeable.

《オプション1》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられてよい。当該1つのSRSリソースは、選択された1つのSRSリソースセットの中から任意に選択されてよい。オプション1(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、シングルパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 1
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set selected from the N SRS resource sets. The one SRS resource may be arbitrarily selected from the selected one SRS resource set. Option 1 (PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a single panel transmission.

《オプション2》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられてよい。この場合、2つのSRSリソースは、同じ(1つの)SRSリソースセットの中から選択され得るため、同じ能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション2(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、同じ能力を有する2つのパネル(対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 2
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set selected from N SRS resource sets. In this case, the two SRS resources may have the same capability since they may be selected from the same (single) SRS resource set. That is, option 2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may mean a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels (symmetric panels) with the same capability.

《オプション3》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれるX個(Xは2より大きい)のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、X個のSRSリソースは、同じ(1つの)SRSリソースセットの中から選択され得るため、同じ能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション3(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれるX個のSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、同じ能力を有するX個のパネル(対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 3
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X SRS resource sets (X is greater than 2) in one SRS resource set selected from N SRS resource sets. In this case, the X SRS resources may have the same capability since they may be selected from the same (single) SRS resource set. That is, option 3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resources in one SRS resource set) may mean a multi-panel transmission utilizing X panels (symmetric panels) with the same capability.

《オプション4》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される2つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、2つのSRSリソースセットは、互いに異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション4(PUSCH送信が、2つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有する2つのパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 4:
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from the N SRS resource sets, where the two SRS resource sets may have different capabilities. That is, option 4 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).

《オプション5》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択されるX個(2<X<N)のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、X個のSRSリソースセットは、互いに異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション5(PUSCH送信が、X個のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有するX個(2以上)のパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 5:
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2<X<N) SRS resource sets selected from N SRS resource sets, where the X SRS resource sets may have different capabilities. That is, option 5 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing X (2 or more) panels (asymmetric panels) with different capabilities.

《オプション6》
 PUSCH送信は、N個の全てのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、N個のSRSリソースセットは、互いに異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション6(PUSCH送信が、N個の全てのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有するN個のパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 6:
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with all N SRS resource sets, where the N SRS resource sets may have different capabilities, i.e., option 6 (PUSCH transmission is associated with all N SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing N panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).

《変形例》
 上述したSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースの選択は、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えばRRC/MAC CE)によって設定/指示されてもよい。具体的には、先ず、L個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットがRRCによって設定され、L個のSRSリソースセットの中からN個のSRSリソースセットがMAC CEによって指示/選択されてもよい。更に、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から、X個のSRSリソースが上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリング(例えばDCI)によって設定/指示されてもよい。このように、選択されるSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)数を上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングによって段階的に絞っていくことにより、UEは適切にSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)を選択することができ、さらにはUE/NWの処理負荷を削減することが可能である。
<<Variation>>
The above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set/SRS resource may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE). Specifically, first, the SRS resource set of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and N SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE. Furthermore, X SRS resources may be set/instructed from the N SRS resource sets by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI). In this way, by gradually narrowing down the number of SRS resource sets (SRS resources) to be selected by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling, the UE can appropriately select the SRS resource set (SRS resource), and further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the UE/NW.

《具体例》
 図20は、図20は、実施形態3-3に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。図20に示すように、パネル切り替えの前において、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4である。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行う。
<<Example>>
Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 3-3. As shown in Fig. 20, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1.

 ここで、SRSリソースセット#0には、2ポートの(2つのSRSポートを有する)2つのSRSリソース(SRSリソース#0,#1)が関連付けられ/含まれている。SRSリソース#0は、パネル#0に関連付けられており、SRSリソース#1は、パネル#1に関連付けられている。この場合、パネル#0,#1は、同じパネルグループに属してよい。すなわち、パネル#0,#1は、同じ能力を有する対称パネルを構成してよい。 Here, SRS resource set #0 is associated/contains two SRS resources (SRS resources #0, #1) with two ports (having two SRS ports). SRS resource #0 is associated with panel #0, and SRS resource #1 is associated with panel #1. In this case, panels #0 and #1 may belong to the same panel group, i.e., panels #0 and #1 may constitute symmetric panels with the same capabilities.

 例えば、UEは、パネル切り替え(パネル#1からパネル#2に切り替える旨)の指示をNWから受信してよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて、SRSリソースセット/SRSリソースを切り替えてよい。 For example, the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching from panel #1 to panel #2) from the NW. The UE may switch the SRS resource set/SRS resource based on the instruction.

 具体的に、SRSリソースセット#0には、2ポートを有する1つのSRSリソースのみが関連付けられ/含まれてよい。当該SRSリソース(SRSリソースセット#0)は、パネル#0に関連付けられてよい。また、SRSリソースセット#1には、4ポートを有する1つのSRSリソースのみが関連付けられ/含まれてよい。当該SRSリソース(SRSリソースセット#1)は、パネル#2に関連付けられてよい。ここで、パネル#0,#2は、異なる能力を有する非対称パネルを構成してよい。 Specifically, SRS resource set #0 may be associated with/include only one SRS resource having two ports. This SRS resource (SRS resource set #0) may be associated with panel #0. Also, SRS resource set #1 may be associated with/include only one SRS resource having four ports. This SRS resource (SRS resource set #1) may be associated with panel #2. Here, panels #0 and #2 may constitute asymmetric panels with different capabilities.

 UEは、切り替えられたSRSリソースセット#1とパネル#2との関連付けに基づき、パネル切り替え後は、パネル#2からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 After the panel switching, the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #1 based on the association between the switched SRS resource set #1 and panel #2.

 このように、図20に示す実施形態3-3では、切り替え前のパネル#1に対応するSRSリソースセット#0(2ポートのSRSリソース#1)を、切り替え先のパネル#2に対応するSRSリソースセット#2(4ポートのSRSリソース)に切り替えることで、パネル切り替えを実現する例を示している。 In this way, embodiment 3-3 shown in FIG. 20 shows an example of achieving panel switching by switching SRS resource set #0 (2-port SRS resource #1) corresponding to panel #1 before switching to SRS resource set #2 (4-port SRS resource) corresponding to panel #2 at the switching destination.

 図21及び図22は、実施形態3-3に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。なお、図21及び図22に示すコードポイントとUL送信スキームの対応付け(組み合わせ)は、変更されてもよい(並べ替えられてもよい)。また、SRSリソースセットの1st/2ndは、SRSリソースセットの順序に基づいて並べ替えられてもよい。また、図21及び図22に示す特定のPUSCH(UL)送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、各図ともそれぞれの一部のみがサポートされてもよい。 FIGS. 21 and 22 are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 3-3. Note that the correspondence (combination) between the code points and the UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 may be changed (rearranged). Also, the 1st/2nd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource sets. Also, it is not necessary for all of the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 to be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.

 図21は、パネル数が3で、2つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。第1のSRSリソースセットは、2つのパネルに関連付けられてよく、第2のリソースセットは、他の1つのパネルに関連付けられてよい。特定のコードポイントは、2ビットのフィールド値で特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 FIG. 21 shows an example where the number of panels is three and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. The first SRS resource set may be associated with the two panels, and the second resource set may be associated with the other panel. A particular code point may indicate the association of a particular PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 2-bit field value.

 例えば、コードポイント00/01は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2のSRSリソースセットから選択される1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント10は、PUSCH送信が、第1のSRSリソースセットから選択される2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント11は、第1及び第2のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。 For example, code point 00/01 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource selected from the first/second SRS resource set. Code point 10 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources selected from the first SRS resource set. Code point 11 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets.

 図22は、パネル数が4で、2つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。第1のSRSリソースセットは、2つのパネルに関連付けられてよく、第2のリソースセットは、他の2つのパネルに関連付けられてよい。特定のコードポイントは、3ビットのフィールド値で特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 FIG. 22 shows an example where the number of panels is four and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. The first SRS resource set may be associated with the two panels, and the second resource set may be associated with the other two panels. A specific code point may indicate the association of a specific PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 3-bit field value.

 例えば、コードポイント000/001は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2のSRSリソースセットから選択される1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント010/011は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2のSRSリソースセットから選択される2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント101は、第1及び第2のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント110/111は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 For example, code points 000/001 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource selected from the first/second SRS resource set. Code points 010/011 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources selected from the first/second SRS resource set. Code point 101 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets. The extra code points 110/111 may be reserved.

 図21及び図22に示すように、パネル数/SRSリソースセット数等に応じて、パネル切り替え指示のためのビット数(SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドの)は増減されてよい。 As shown in Figures 21 and 22, the number of bits for panel switching instructions (in the SRS resource set indicator field) may be increased or decreased depending on the number of panels/number of SRS resource sets, etc.

《実施形態3-4》
 実施形態3-4は、CBのPUSCHにのみ適用されてもよく、NCBのPUSCHには適用されなくてもよい。
<<Embodiment 3-4>>
Embodiments 3-4 may be applied only to the PUSH of the CB, and may not be applied to the PUSH of the NCB.

 実施形態3-4では、M個のパネルがN個のグループに分割されるケースを想定する(NはM以下であってよい)。同じグループ内のパネルは、同じ能力を有してよい。すなわち、同じグループに属するパネルは、互いに対称パネルを構成してよい。また、異なるグループ同士は、異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、グループを跨ぐパネル同士は、互いに非対称パネルを構成してよい。 In embodiments 3-4, a case is assumed in which M panels are divided into N groups (N may be equal to or less than M). Panels in the same group may have the same capabilities. That is, panels belonging to the same group may form symmetrical panels. Also, different groups may have different capabilities. That is, panels across groups may form asymmetrical panels.

 また、分割されたグループ数に対応したN個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。各SRSリソースセットは、同じ能力を有するパネルグループ(パネル群)に対応してよい。すなわち、上述のグループとパネルグループは、互いに読み替えられてよい。 Furthermore, N CB/NCB SRS resource sets corresponding to the number of divided groups may be set. Each SRS resource set may correspond to a panel group (panel group) having the same capabilities. In other words, the above-mentioned groups and panel groups may be read as interchangeable.

 上述したように、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(フィールド/特定のフィールドと呼ばれてもよい)は、UL送信スキーム間の動的切り替えを指示するために利用されてよい。SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、例えばDCIに含まれてよく、以下のオプション1~4の少なくとも1つを指示してもよい。以下のオプション1~4は、PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)との関連付けが指示されることを意味してよい。 As mentioned above, the SRS resource set indicator field (which may also be referred to as a field/specific field) may be utilized to indicate dynamic switching between UL transmission schemes. The SRS resource set indicator field may be included in the DCI, for example, and may indicate at least one of the following options 1 to 4. The following options 1 to 4 may mean that an association between a PUSCH transmission and a certain SRS resource set (SRS resource) is indicated.

 本開示において、「PUSCH送信と、あるSRSリソースセットとが関連付けられること」、及び「あるSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースを選択すること」は、互いに読み替えられてよい。 In this disclosure, "associating a PUSCH transmission with a certain SRS resource set" and "selecting a certain SRS resource set/SRS resource" may be interpreted as interchangeable.

《オプション1》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、SRI(SRSリソースインジケータ)は、以下のオプション1―1~1-3の少なくとも1つを指示してもよい。
Option 1
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource set selected from the N SRS resource sets, in which case an SRS resource indicator (SRI) may indicate at least one of the following options 1-1 to 1-3.

<オプション1-1>
 PUSCH送信は、1つのSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられてよい。オプション1-1(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる1つのSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、シングルパネル送信を意味してよい。
<Option 1-1>
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with one SRS resource selected from one SRS resource set. Option 1-1 (PUSCH transmission is associated with one SRS resource included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a single panel transmission.

<オプション1-2>
 PUSCH送信は、1つのSRSリソースセットの中から選択される2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられてよい。オプション1-2(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれる2つのSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、同じ能力を有する2つのパネル(対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
<Option 1-2>
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resources selected from one SRS resource set. Option 1-2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with the same capabilities (symmetric panels).

<オプション1-3>
 PUSCH送信は、1つのSRSリソースセットの中から選択されるX個(Xは2より大きい)のSRSリソースに関連付けられてよい。オプション1-3(PUSCH送信が、1つのSRSリソースセットに含まれるX個のSRSリソースに関連付けられること)は、同じ能力を有するX個のパネル(対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
<Option 1-3>
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X SRS resources (X is greater than 2) selected from one SRS resource set. Options 1-3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resources included in one SRS resource set) may refer to multi-panel transmission utilizing X panels (symmetric panels) with the same capabilities.

《オプション2》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される2つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。オプション2(PUSCH送信が、2つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有する2つのパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 2
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with two SRS resource sets selected from among the N SRS resource sets. Option 2 (PUSCH transmission is associated with two SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing two panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).

《オプション3》
 PUSCH送信は、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択されるX個(2<X<N)のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。オプション3(PUSCH送信が、X個のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有するX個(2以上)のパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 3
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with X (2<X<N) SRS resource sets selected from among N SRS resource sets. Option 3 (PUSCH transmission is associated with X SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing X (greater than or equal to 2) panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).

《オプション4》
 PUSCH送信は、N個の全てのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。この場合、N個のSRSリソースセットは、互いに異なる能力を有してよい。すなわち、オプション6(PUSCH送信が、N個の全てのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられること)は、異なる能力を有するN個のパネル(非対称パネル)を利用したマルチパネル送信を意味してよい。
Option 4:
A PUSCH transmission may be associated with all N SRS resource sets, where the N SRS resource sets may have different capabilities, i.e., option 6 (PUSCH transmission is associated with all N SRS resource sets) may refer to a multi-panel transmission utilizing N panels with different capabilities (asymmetric panels).

《変形例》
 上述したSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースの選択は、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えばRRC/MAC CE)によって設定/指示されてもよい。具体的には、先ず、L個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットがRRCによって設定され、L個のSRSリソースセットの中からN個のSRSリソースセットがMAC CEによって指示/選択されてもよい。更に、N個のSRSリソースセットの中から、X個のSRSリソースが上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリング(例えばDCI)によって設定/指示されてもよい。このように、選択されるSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)数を上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングによって段階的に絞っていくことにより、UEは適切にSRSリソースセット(SRSリソース)を選択することができ、さらにはUE/NWの処理負荷を削減することが可能である。
<<Variation>>
The above-mentioned selection of the SRS resource set/SRS resource may be set/instructed by upper layer signaling (e.g., RRC/MAC CE). Specifically, first, the SRS resource set of L CB/NCB may be set by RRC, and N SRS resource sets may be specified/selected from the L SRS resource sets by MAC CE. Furthermore, X SRS resources may be set/instructed from the N SRS resource sets by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI). In this way, by gradually narrowing down the number of SRS resource sets (SRS resources) to be selected by upper layer signaling/physical layer signaling, the UE can appropriately select the SRS resource set (SRS resource), and further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the UE/NW.

《具体例》
 図23A-図23Bは、実施形態3-4に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド/SRSリソースインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。なお、図23A-図23Bに示すコードポイントとUL送信スキームの対応付け(組み合わせ)は、変更されてもよい(並べ替えられてもよい)。また、SRSリソースセットの1st/2ndは、SRSリソースセットの順序に基づいて並べ替えられてもよい。また、図23A-図23Bに示す特定のPUSCH(UL)送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、各図ともそれぞれの一部のみがサポートされてもよい。
<<Example>>
23A-23B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field/SRS resource indicator field according to embodiments 3-4. The correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 23A-23B may be changed (rearranged). Also, the 1st/2nd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource set. Also, the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 23A-23B may not all be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.

 図23A-図23Bは、パネル数が3で、2つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd)の少なくとも1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。図23AはSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドに対応し、図23BはSRSリソースインジケータフィールド(SRIフィールド)に対応する。第1のSRSリソースセットは、2つのパネルに関連付けられてよく、第2のリソースセットは、他の1つのパネルに関連付けられてよい。特定のコードポイントは、2ビットのフィールド値で特定のPUSCH送信とSRSリソースセットとの関連付けを示してよい。 Figures 23A and 23B show an example where the number of panels is three and at least one of the two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. Figure 23A corresponds to the SRS resource set indicator field, and Figure 23B corresponds to the SRS resource indicator field (SRI field). The first SRS resource set may be associated with two panels, and the second resource set may be associated with the other panel. A particular code point may indicate the association of a particular PUSCH transmission with an SRS resource set in a 2-bit field value.

 図23Aにおいて、例えば、コードポイント00/01は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント10は、PUSCH送信が、第1及び第2のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント11は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 In FIG. 23A, for example, code points 00/01 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource set. Code point 10 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first and second SRS resource sets. The redundant code point 11 may be reserved.

 図23Bにおいて、例えば、コードポイント00/01は、PUSCH送信が、第1のSRSリソースセットから選択される第1/第2のSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。コードポイント10は、PUSCH送信が、第1のSRSリソースセットから選択される2つ(第1及び第2)のSRSリソースに関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント11は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 In FIG. 23B, for example, code points 00/01 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource selected from the first SRS resource set. Code point 10 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with two (first and second) SRS resources selected from the first SRS resource set. The redundant code point 11 may be reserved.

 以上説明した第3の実施形態によれば、UEは、複数のパネルが適用される複数のケースに応じたパネル切り替えを実現することができる。
を明確に区別/分類することができる。
According to the third embodiment described above, the UE can realize panel switching according to a plurality of cases in which a plurality of panels are applied.
can be clearly distinguished/classified.

<第4の実施形態>
 第4の実施形態は、上述の問題2に関し、パネル切り替えの動的指示のためのDCIフィールド(SRIフィールド/TPMIフィールド)について説明する。
Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment relates to problem 2 above and describes a DCI field (SRI field/TPMI field) for dynamic indication of panel switching.

 シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいてTDMを適用した繰り返し送信、シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいてSDM/SFNを適用したSTxMPにおいて、X個(Xは2以上)のパネル/TRPを利用したUL送信とシングルパネル/TRPを利用したUL送信との間の動的な切り替えがサポートされてよい。例えば、X個のパネル/TRPによるUL送信は、当該UL送信をスケジューリングするDCI(に含まれるSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールド)によって指示されてよい。具体的にサポート可能なケースは、例えば以下のケース1~3が挙げられる。 In repeated transmissions using TDM in a single DCI-based multi-TRP and STxMP using SDM/SFN in a single DCI-based multi-TRP, dynamic switching between UL transmissions using X panels/TRPs (X is 2 or more) and UL transmissions using a single panel/TRP may be supported. For example, UL transmissions using X panels/TRPs may be indicated by (the SRI field/TPMI field contained in) a DCI that schedules the UL transmission. Specific cases that can be supported include the following cases 1 to 3.

《ケース1》
 X個のパネル/TRPによるUL送信が指示され、DCIにおいてSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドが指示される場合、各フィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。
Case 1
If UL transmission with X panels/TRPs is indicated and an SRI/TPMI field is indicated in the DCI, each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.

《ケース2》
 Y個(1<Y<X:Xは2より大きい)のパネル/TRPによるUL送信が指示される場合、更に以下の選択肢1~3に分類できる。
(選択肢1)
 DCIは、例えば最大パネル数に応じたX個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのうち、Y個(例えば最初のY個)のSSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドが適用されてもよい。この場合、各フィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。また、残りのフィールドは、リザーブド(予約フィールド)であってよい。
(選択肢2)
 DCIは、Y個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。Y個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドは、X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドの中から選択され得る。この場合、各フィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。
(選択肢3)
 DCIは、例えば最大パネル数に応じたX個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのうち、一部のフィールドは、共同解釈(jointly interpreted)/連結(concatenated)されてもよい。これによりX個のフィールドは、Y個のフィールドとして再解釈(reinterpreted)されてもよい。各フィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。
Case 2
When UL transmission by Y panels/TRPs (1<Y<X: X is greater than 2) is indicated, it can be further classified into the following options 1 to 3.
(Option 1)
The DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, and Y (e.g., the first Y) SSRI/TPMI fields may be applied among the X SRI/TPMI fields. In this case, each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource. The remaining fields may be reserved.
(Option 2)
The DCI may have Y SRI/TPMI fields, which may be selected from among X SRI/TPMI fields, where each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
(Option 3)
The DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, for example. Some of the X SRI/TPMI fields may be jointly interpreted/concatenated. Thus, the X fields may be reinterpreted as Y fields. Each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.

《ケース3》
 シングルパネル/TRPによるUL送信が指示される場合、更に以下の選択肢1~3に分類できる。
(選択肢1)
 DCIは、例えば最大パネル数に応じたX個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのうち、1つ(例えば最初の1つ)のSSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドが適用されてもよい。この場合、各フィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。また、残りのフィールドは、リザーブド(予約フィールド)であってよい。
(選択肢2)
 DCIは、1つのSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。1つのSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドは、X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドの中から任意で選択されてよい(例えば最初のフィールドであってよい)。この場合、当該1つのフィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。
(選択肢3)
 DCIは、例えば最大パネル数に応じたX個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドを有してよい。X個のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのうち、全て/一部のフィールドは、共同解釈(jointly interpreted)/連結(concatenated)されてもよい。これによりX個のフィールドは、1つのフィールドとして再解釈(reinterpreted)されてもよい。当該1つのフィールドは、1つのSRSリソースセット/SRIリソースに関連付けられてよい。
Case 3
When UL transmission by a single panel/TRP is indicated, it can be further classified into the following options 1 to 3.
(Option 1)
The DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, for example. Of the X SRI/TPMI fields, one (e.g., the first one) SSRI/TPMI field may be applied. In this case, each field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource. The remaining fields may be reserved.
(Option 2)
The DCI may have one SRI/TPMI field, which may be arbitrarily selected from the X SRI/TPMI fields (e.g., may be the first field), and which may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.
(Option 3)
The DCI may have X SRI/TPMI fields depending on the maximum number of panels, and all/some of the X SRI/TPMI fields may be jointly interpreted/concatenated. Thus, the X fields may be reinterpreted as one field. The one field may be associated with one SRS resource set/SRI resource.

《変形例》
 また、あるSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドは、DCIの動的指示によって異なるパラメータ(パネル固有の)に関連付けられてもよい。例えば、あるSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドがDCIの動的指示によって異なるパラメータ(パネル固有の)に関連付けられるケース、又は、あるSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドは、同じSRSリソースセット/SRSリソースと関連付けられるが、当該SRSリソースセット/SRSリソースは、DCIの動的指示によって異なるパラメータ(パネル固有の)を適用できるケースが存在し得る。これらのケースの場合、あるSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのサイズは、異なるSRSリソースセット/SRSリソース、又は異なるパラメータ(パネル固有の)に必要な最大サイズとして決定されてよい。
<<Variation>>
Also, an SRI field/TPMI field may be associated with different parameters (panel-specific) by the dynamic instruction of the DCI. For example, there may be cases where an SRI field/TPMI field is associated with different parameters (panel-specific) by the dynamic instruction of the DCI, or where an SRI field/TPMI field is associated with the same SRS resource set/SRS resource, but the SRS resource set/SRS resource may apply different parameters (panel-specific) by the dynamic instruction of the DCI. In these cases, the size of an SRI field/TPMI field may be determined as the maximum size required for the different SRS resource set/SRS resource or the different parameters (panel-specific).

 ここで、最大サイズとは、複数のパネル/TRPに跨るSRSポートの可能な全ての組み合わせを実現する最大サイズを意味してよい。例えば、UEが4つパネルを有し、各パネルのポート数が2,2,4,4である場合を想定する。このケースにおいて、2つのパネルを利用する場合、合計のポート数が最大となる2つのパネルの組み合わせは、4+4=8ポートである。したがって、この場合のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのサイズは、4+4=8ポートに基づいて決定されてよい。 Here, the maximum size may mean the maximum size that realizes all possible combinations of SRS ports across multiple panels/TRPs. For example, consider a case where a UE has four panels, with the number of ports on each panel being 2, 2, 4, and 4. In this case, when two panels are used, the combination of the two panels that results in the maximum total number of ports is 4 + 4 = 8 ports. Therefore, the size of the SRI field/TPMI field in this case may be determined based on 4 + 4 = 8 ports.

 また、このケースにおいて、UEが2+2=4ポートに対応する2つのパネルを動的に指示される場合、一部の(第1/第2の)SRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドは、使用されなくてよい。 Also, in this case, if the UE is dynamically instructed to use two panels corresponding to 2+2=4 ports, some (first/second) SRI/TPMI fields may not be used.

 このように、4+4=8ポート/2+2=4ポート間でパネルが切り替わる場合、複数のパネルの合計のポート数に応じて第1/第2のSRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのサイズに影響を与え得る(フィールドサイズが異なる/変化する)ケースが想定される。指示されるパネルに応じて必要なフィールドのサイズが異なる場合、当該フィールドのサイズを認識するためにUEは、より多くのブラインド検出が必要となる。 In this way, when the panel is switched between 4+4=8 ports/2+2=4 ports, cases are conceivable where the size of the first/second SRI field/TPMI field may be affected (field size may differ/change) depending on the total number of ports on multiple panels. If the size of the required field differs depending on the panel specified, the UE will need to perform more blind detection to recognize the size of the field.

 本開示では、そのようなケースを想定して、複数のパネルの組み合わせによって取り得る最大ポート数に応じたフィールドのサイズを決定する(最大サイズを採用する)ことにより、不要なブラインド検出をなくしてUE負荷を低減すると共にDCIオーバーヘッドを削減することが可能である。 In this disclosure, assuming such a case, by determining the field size according to the maximum number of ports that can be achieved by combining multiple panels (adopting the maximum size), it is possible to eliminate unnecessary blind detection, reduce the UE load, and reduce DCI overhead.

 また、上述したように、本開示において、パネル固有のパラメータは、SRSポート数/SRSリソース数/フルパワーモード/コードブックサブセットの少なくとも1つを参照することができる。 Also, as described above, in this disclosure, the panel-specific parameters can refer to at least one of the number of SRS ports, the number of SRS resources, the full power mode, and the codebook subset.

 上述のケース1~3に示すように、取り得る複数パネルの組み合わせによって合計のポート数、SRIフィールド/TPMIフィールドのサイズが異なる場合、当該フィールドのサイズは、異なるケースにおける最大サイズに基づいて決定されてよい。 As shown in cases 1 to 3 above, when the total number of ports and the size of the SRI field/TPMI field differ depending on the possible combinations of multiple panels, the size of the fields may be determined based on the maximum size in the different cases.

 また、パネル切り替えによってDCIのサイズが切り替え前より小さくなる場合、DCIにゼロをパディングして(追加して)サイズを調整してもよい(揃えてもよい)。 Also, if the size of the DCI becomes smaller after panel switching, the size may be adjusted (aligned) by padding (adding) zeros to the DCI.

 以上説明した第4の実施形態によれば、UEは、複数のパネルが適用される複数のケースに応じたパネル切り替えを、DCIを用いて実現することができる。 According to the fourth embodiment described above, the UE can use DCI to realize panel switching according to multiple cases in which multiple panels are applied.

<第5の実施形態>
 第5の実施形態は、上述の問題3に関し、マルチDCIベースのUL送信におけるパネルの動的な切り替えについて説明する。
Fifth embodiment
The fifth embodiment relates to problem 3 above and describes dynamic panel switching in multi-DCI based UL transmission.

 上述の問題3で説明したように、マルチDCIベースのSTxMPにおいて、CORESETPoolInex#0(=0)は、より低いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられ、CORESETPoolIndex#1(=1)は、より高いIDを有するCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる。この関連付けは、固定されている。 As explained in problem 3 above, in multi-DCI based STxMP, CORESETPoolInex#0 (=0) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with a lower ID, and CORESETPoolIndex#1 (=1) is associated with the SRS resource set of the CB/NCB with a higher ID. This association is fixed.

 しかしながら、非対称パネルにおいて、上述した各実施形態のように、UEの移動に応じたパネルの切り替えを実現するためには、パネルとTRPとの関連付けが変更される必要がある。この場合、上述したCORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの固定的な対応関係が原因となって、適切なパネル切り替えに影響を及ぼす可能性がある(例えば図25の上半部分を参照)。 However, in asymmetric panels, to realize panel switching in response to UE movement as in the above-mentioned embodiments, the association between the panel and the TRP needs to be changed. In this case, the fixed correspondence between the CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set described above may affect appropriate panel switching (see, for example, the upper half of Figure 25).

 すなわち、パネル切り替えに応じてCORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの関連付けも切り替えられる必要がある。 In other words, the association between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource set needs to be able to be switched according to panel switching.

 そこで、第5の実施形態では、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの関連付けの切り替えについて説明する。なお、第5の実施形態では、UL送信としてSTxMPを例示するが、これに限定されず、他のUL送信にも適用することが可能である。 Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, switching of the association between CORESETPoolIndex and an SRS resource set will be described. Note that in the fifth embodiment, STxMP is exemplified as UL transmission, but this is not limited thereto, and it is also possible to apply it to other UL transmissions.

 例えば、マルチDCIベースのUL送信(STxMP)において、CORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられるDCIによってUL送信がスケジュールされる場合、UEは、M個(Mは2以上)のパネルのうち、任意の1つのパネルを利用するシングルパネルUL送信(例えばPUSCH送信)を動的に指示されてよい。なお、M個のパネルから選択され得るパネルは、1つに限らず、いくつかであってもよい。 For example, in multi-DCI-based UL transmission (STxMP), when UL transmission is scheduled by DCI associated with CORESETPoolIndex, the UE may be dynamically instructed to perform single-panel UL transmission (e.g., PUSCH transmission) using any one of M panels (M is 2 or more). Note that the number of panels that can be selected from the M panels is not limited to one, and may be several.

 図24A-図24Bは、第5の実施形態に係るCORESETPoolIndexごとのUL送信スキームのパターンを示す図である。 FIG. 24A-FIG. 24B are diagrams showing UL transmission scheme patterns for each CORESETPoolIndex in the fifth embodiment.

 図24Aに示すように、CORESETPoolIndex#0(=0)に関連付けられるDCIによってスケジュールされるUL送信は、パネル#1/#2を利用したシングルパネル送信間の動的切り替えがサポートされてよい。 As shown in FIG. 24A, UL transmissions scheduled by DCI associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0 (=0) may support dynamic switching between single panel transmissions using panels #1/#2.

 図24Bに示すように、CORESETPoolIndex#1(=1)に関連付けられるDCIによってスケジュールされるUL送信は、パネル#1/#2を利用したシングルパネル送信間の動的切り替えがサポートされてよい。 As shown in FIG. 24B, UL transmissions scheduled by DCI associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1 (=1) may support dynamic switching between single panel transmissions using panels #1/#2.

《実施形態5-1》
 実施形態5-1は、マルチDCIベースのSTxMPにおいて、2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されるケースに関する。
<<Embodiment 5-1>>
Embodiment 5-1 relates to a case in which two CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured in multi-DCI-based STxMP.

 2つのCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定される場合、第1のSRSリソースセットは、CORESETPoolIndex#0と関連付けられてよく、第2のSRSリソースセットは、CORESETPoolIndex#1に関連付けられてよい。すなわち、この関連付けは、上述した固定的な関連付けと同じであってよい。 When two CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured, the first SRS resource set may be associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0, and the second SRS resource set may be associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1. That is, this association may be the same as the fixed association described above.

 1つのSRSリソースセットは、ネットワーク(NW)からの動的な指示に基づいて、異なるパネルに対して異なるパラメータ(例えば、SRSポート数、他のパネル固有のパラメータ等)を適用することができる。 A single SRS resource set can apply different parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) to different panels based on dynamic instructions from the network (NW).

 例えば、1つのSRSリソースセットは、複数のパネルに対して複数のパラメータ(例えば、SRSポート数、他のパネル固有のパラメータ等)のセットを準静的に設定されてよい。この場合、NWは、SRSリソースセットとパネルの間の関連付けを動的に指示/更新してもよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて更新されたパラメータのセットを1つのSRSリソースセットに適用してよい。 For example, one SRS resource set may be semi-statically configured with a set of multiple parameters (e.g., number of SRS ports, other panel-specific parameters, etc.) for multiple panels. In this case, the NW may dynamically instruct/update the association between the SRS resource set and the panel. The UE may apply the updated set of parameters to one SRS resource set based on the instruction.

 また、1つのSRSリソースのパラメータは、NWによって動的に指示/更新されてよい。 Furthermore, the parameters of one SRS resource may be dynamically instructed/updated by the NW.

《具体例》
 図25は、実施形態5-1に係るパネル切り替えの一例を示す図である。図25に示すように、パネル切り替えの前において、2つのパネル(パネル#0~#1)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,4である。UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行う。TRP#0は、CORESETPoolIndex#0(SRSリソースセット#0)と関連付けられており、TRP#1は、CORESETPoolIndex#1(SRSリソースセット#1)と関連付けられている。
<<Example>>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of panel switching according to embodiment 5-1. As shown in FIG. 25, before panel switching, the number of SRS ports of each of the two panels (panels #0 to #1) is 2 and 4. The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, and performs UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1. TRP #0 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex #0 (SRS resource set #0), and TRP #1 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex #1 (SRS resource set #1).

 ここで、SRSリソースセット#0は、上述のパラメータとして2ポートのSRSリソース(2つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#0は、パネル#0に関連付けられている。 Here, SRS resource set #0 is associated/configured with two SRS resources (two SRS ports) as the above-mentioned parameters. SRS resource set #0 is also associated with panel #0.

 同様に、SRSリソースセット#1は、パラメータとして4ポートのSRSリソース(4つのSRSポート)が関連付けられ/設定されている。また、SRSリソースセット#1は、パネル#1に関連付けられている。 Similarly, SRS resource set #1 is associated/configured with 4-port SRS resources (4 SRS ports) as parameters. SRS resource set #1 is also associated with panel #1.

 例えば、UEは、パネル切り替え(パネル#0/#1間の切り替え)の指示をNWから受信してよい。UEは、当該指示に基づいて、SRSリソースセット#0のSRSポート数を2から4に更新し、SRSリソースセット#1のSRSポート数を4から2に更新してよい。 For example, the UE may receive an instruction for panel switching (switching between panels #0 and #1) from the NW. Based on the instruction, the UE may update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #0 from 2 to 4, and update the number of SRS ports in SRS resource set #1 from 4 to 2.

 また、UEは、更新されたSRSリソースセット#0(SRSポート数)を適用し、当該SRSリソースセット#0とパネルとの関連付けをパネル#0からパネル#1に更新してよい。同様にUEは、更新されたSRSリソースセット#1(SRSポート数)を適用し、当該SRSリソースセット#1とパネルとの関連付けをパネル#1からパネル#0に更新してよい。 The UE may also apply the updated SRS resource set #0 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #0 and the panel from panel #0 to panel #1. Similarly, the UE may apply the updated SRS resource set #1 (number of SRS ports) and update the association between the SRS resource set #1 and the panel from panel #1 to panel #0.

 UEは、更新されたSRSリソースセット#0とパネル#1との関連付け、及び更新されたSRSリソースセット#1とパネル#0との関連付けに基づき、パネル切り替え後は、パネル#1からTRP#0に向けて、パネル#0からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行ってよい。 Based on the updated association between SRS resource set #0 and panel #1, and the updated association between SRS resource set #1 and panel #0, after panel switching, the UE may perform UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #0 and from panel #0 to TRP #1.

 このように、図25に示す実施形態5-1では、パネル切り替えの際、CORESETPoolIndexとTRPとの関連付けはそのまま維持しつつ、SRSリソースセットに対応するパラメータを更新し、当該SRSリソースセットに関連付くパネルを切り替える例を示している。 In this way, in embodiment 5-1 shown in FIG. 25, when switching panels, the association between CORESETPoolIndex and TRP is maintained as is, but the parameters corresponding to the SRS resource set are updated, and the panel associated with that SRS resource set is switched.

《実施形態5-2》
 実施形態5-2は、マルチDCIベースのSTxMPにおいて、M個(Mは2以上)のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されるケースに関する。
<<Embodiment 5-2>>
Embodiment 5-2 relates to a case in which M (M is 2 or more) CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured in multi-DCI-based STxMP.

 M個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定される場合、複数パネル間の動的な切り替えを指示するために、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(他のフィールド/新規のフィールドであってもよい)が利用されてよい。SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、M個のSRSリソースセットの中から選択される1つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられるPUSCH送信を指示してもよい。選択される1つのSRSリソースセットは、M個のSRSリソースセットの中の任意の1つのSRSリソースセットであってよい。また、選択されるSRSリソースセットは、1つに限らず、いくつかのSRSリソースセットであってよい。 When M CB/NCB SRS resource sets are configured, an SRS resource set indicator field (which may be another field/new field) may be used to indicate dynamic switching between multiple panels. The SRS resource set indicator field may indicate a PUSCH transmission associated with one SRS resource set selected from the M SRS resource sets. The one SRS resource set selected may be any one SRS resource set among the M SRS resource sets. Also, the selected SRS resource set is not limited to one, and may be several SRS resource sets.

《具体例》
 図26A-図26Bは、実施形態5-2に係るSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド内の特定のコードポイントによって指示されるPUSCH送信スキームのパターン/組み合わせ例を示す図である。なお、図26A-図26Bに示すコードポイントとUL送信スキームの対応付け(組み合わせ)は、変更されてもよい(並べ替えられてもよい)。また、SRSリソースセットの1st/2nd/3rdは、SRSリソースセットの順序に基づいて並べ替えられてもよい。また、図26A-図26Bに示す特定のPUSCH(UL)送信スキームは、全てがサポートされなくてもよく、各図ともそれぞれの一部のみがサポートされてもよい。
<<Example>>
26A-26B are diagrams showing examples of patterns/combinations of PUSCH transmission schemes indicated by specific code points in the SRS resource set indicator field according to embodiment 5-2. The correspondence (combination) of the code points and UL transmission schemes shown in FIG. 26A-26B may be changed (rearranged). Also, the 1st/2nd/3rd of the SRS resource set may be rearranged based on the order of the SRS resource set. Also, the specific PUSCH (UL) transmission schemes shown in FIG. 26A-26B may not all be supported, and only a part of each of the diagrams may be supported.

 図26Aは、2つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd)のうちの1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。具体的にコードポイント0~1は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。 FIG. 26A shows an example in which one of two SRS resource sets (1st/2nd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. Specifically, code points 0-1 may indicate that a PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second SRS resource set.

 図26Bは、3つのSRSリソースセット(1st/2nd/3rd)のうちの1つがPUSCH送信に関連付けられる例を示している。具体的にコードポイント0~2は、PUSCH送信が、第1/第2/第3のSRSリソースセットに関連付けられることを示してよい。余剰のコードポイント3は、リザーブド(Reserved)であってよい。 FIG. 26B shows an example in which one of three SRS resource sets (1st/2nd/3rd) is associated with a PUSCH transmission. Specifically, code points 0 to 2 may indicate that the PUSCH transmission is associated with the first/second/third SRS resource set. The remaining code point 3 may be reserved.

《実施形態5-3》
 実施形態5-3は、マルチDCIベースのSTxMPにおいて、MAC CEを用いたパネル切り替えに関する。
<<Embodiment 5-3>>
The embodiment 5-3 relates to panel switching using MAC CE in multi-DCI-based STxMP.

 マルチDCIのケースでは、UEのローテーションに伴ってパネルが切り替わることが想定される。この場合、パネル切り替えの速度が問題と成り得る。例えば、基地局(gNB)は、L1-RSRP/SINRに関するビームレポートに基づいてUEのローテーションを認識できる可能性がある。しかしながら、基地局は、UEのローテーションを認識ために所定の時間(例えば数ミリ秒)を要する。 In the case of multi-DCI, it is assumed that the panel will be switched as the UE rotates. In this case, the speed of panel switching can be an issue. For example, the base station (gNB) may be able to recognize the UE rotation based on the beam report regarding L1-RSRP/SINR. However, the base station requires a certain amount of time (e.g., several milliseconds) to recognize the UE rotation.

 また、マルチTRP間のバックホールが理想的でない場合、あるTRPがDCIを用いてパネル切り替えを指示すると、バックホール経由で他の基地局が当該指示を認識するために時間を要することが想定される。 In addition, if the backhaul between multiple TRPs is not ideal, when one TRP uses DCI to instruct panel switching, it is expected that it will take time for other base stations to recognize the instruction via the backhaul.

 このような、パネル切り替え時におけるUE/gNBの処理時間を鑑み、MAC CEベースのパネル切り替え/アクティベーションを提案する。 In consideration of the UE/gNB processing time required for panel switching, we propose MAC CE-based panel switching/activation.

 実施形態5-3では、実施形態5-2と同様に、M個(Mは2以上)のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。ここで、SRSリソースセットとCORESETPoolIndexとの関連付けは、MAC CEによって指示されてよい。 In embodiment 5-3, as in embodiment 5-2, M (M is 2 or more) CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured. Here, the association between the SRS resource set and the CORESETPoolIndex may be indicated by the MAC CE.

(選択肢1)
 MAC CEは、CORESETPoolIndexを指示するフィールドと、当該CORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられるSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドと、を含んでよい。また、MAC CEは、複数のCORESETPoolIndexを指示するフィールドと、当該複数のCORESETPoolIndexのそれぞれに関連付けられる複数のSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドと、を含んでよい。
(Option 1)
The MAC CE may include a field indicating a CORESETPoolIndex and an SRS resource set indicator field associated with the CORESETPoolIndex. The MAC CE may also include a field indicating multiple CORESETPoolIndexes and multiple SRS resource set indicator fields associated with each of the multiple CORESETPoolIndexes.

(選択肢2)
 MAC CEは、CORESETPoolIndexを含まなくてもよい。この場合、MAC CEは、当該CORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられる複数のSRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドと、を含んでよい。当該MAC CEによって指示される各SRSリソースセットは、1つのCORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられてよい。例えば、SRSリソースセットインジケータの最初(第1)のフィールドは、CORESETPoolIndex#0に対応し、2番目(第2)のフィールドは、CORESETPoolIndex#1に対応してよい。
(Option 2)
The MAC CE may not include a CORESETPoolIndex. In this case, the MAC CE may include multiple SRS resource set indicator fields associated with the CORESETPoolIndex. Each SRS resource set indicated by the MAC CE may be associated with one CORESETPoolIndex. For example, the first field of the SRS resource set indicator may correspond to CORESETPoolIndex#0, and the second field may correspond to CORESETPoolIndex#1.

《変形例》
 CORESETPoolIndexの値(#0/#1)は、MAC CEによってSRSリソースセットごとに更新されてよい。また、先ずSRSリソースセットごとにRRCによってCORESETPoolIndexの値(#0/#1)が設定され、SRSリソースセットごとにMAC CEによって特定のCORESETPoolIndexがアクティベート/ディアクティベートされてもよい。
<<Variation>>
The value (#0/#1) of CORESETPoolIndex may be updated for each SRS resource set by the MAC CE. Alternatively, the value (#0/#1) of CORESETPoolIndex may be set for each SRS resource set by the RRC first, and a specific CORESETPoolIndex may be activated/deactivated for each SRS resource set by the MAC CE.

 実施形態5-3によれば、MAC CEを用いてSRSリソースセットごとに対応するCORESETPoolIndexを柔軟に切り替えることができる。 According to embodiment 5-3, the MAC CE can be used to flexibly switch the corresponding CORESETPoolIndex for each SRS resource set.

 以上説明した第5の実施形態によれば、UEは、マルチDCIベースのUL送信におけるパネルの動的な切り替えをDCI/MAC CEを用いて実現することができる。 According to the fifth embodiment described above, the UE can realize dynamic panel switching in multi-DCI-based UL transmission by using DCI/MAC CE.

<第6の実施形態>
 第6の実施形態は、上述の問題4に関し、マルチDCIベースのUL送信において、2以上のパネルをサポートする方法について説明する。なお、第6の実施形態では、UL送信としてSTxMPを例示するが、これに限定されず、他のUL送信にも適用することが可能である。
Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment describes a method for supporting two or more panels in multi-DCI-based UL transmission, in relation to the above-mentioned problem 4. In the sixth embodiment, STxMP is exemplified as UL transmission, but the present invention is not limited thereto and can be applied to other UL transmissions.

 マルチDCIベースのUL送信において、2以上のパネルをサポートするために、以下のオプション1~2の少なくとも1つが適用されてよい。 In multi-DCI based UL transmission, to support two or more panels, at least one of the following options 1-2 may be applied.

《オプション1》
 X個(Xは2より大きい)のCORESETPoolIndexが設定されてよい。各CORESETPoolIndexは、1つのSRSリソースセットに関連付けられてよい。あるCORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられるDCIによってスケジュールされるPUSCHは、1つのSRSリソースセット及び1つのパネルに関連付けられてよい。
Option 1
X (X is greater than 2) CORESETPoolIndex may be configured. Each CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with one SRS resource set. A PUSCH scheduled by a DCI associated with a certain CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with one SRS resource set and one panel.

(オプション1-1)
 X個のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。CORESETPoolIndexと当該SRSリソースセットとの関連付けは、固定的又は準静的に設定されもよい。例えば上述した実施形態5-1を適用して動的なパネル切り替えがサポートされてもよい。
(Option 1-1)
An SRS resource set of X CBs/NCBs may be set. The association between CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set may be set statically or semi-statically. For example, dynamic panel switching may be supported by applying the above-mentioned embodiment 5-1.

 また、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの関連付けは、CORESETPoolIndexの順序とSRSリソースセットインジケータの順序に基づいてもよい。 In addition, the association between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource sets may be based on the order of CORESETPoolIndex and the order of SRS resource set indicators.

(オプション1-2)
 M個(MはX以上)のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。関連するSRSリソースセットは、動的なパネル切り替えをサポートするため、実施形態5-2/5-3と同様に、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(を含むDCI/MAC CE)によって動的に指示されてもよい。
(Option 1-2)
M (M is equal to or greater than X) SRS resource sets of CB/NCB may be configured. The associated SRS resource set may be dynamically indicated by the SRS resource set indicator field (including the DCI/MAC CE) in the same manner as in embodiment 5-2/5-3 in order to support dynamic panel switching.

《オプション2》
 Rel.18と同様に、2つのCORESETPoolIndexが設定されてよい。各CORESETPoolIndexは、複数のSRSリソースセットと関連付けられてよい。あるCORESETPoolIndexに関連付けられるDCIによってスケジュールされるPUSCHは、複数のSRSリソースセット及び複数のパネルに関連付けられてよい。
Option 2
Similar to Rel. 18, two CORESETPoolIndexes may be configured. Each CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with multiple SRS resource sets. A PUSCH scheduled by a DCI associated with a certain CORESETPoolIndex may be associated with multiple SRS resource sets and multiple panels.

(オプション2-1)
 X個(Xは2より大きい)のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。CORESETPoolIndexと当該SRSリソースセットとの関連付けは、固定的又は準静的に設定されもよい。例えば上述した実施形態5-1を適用して動的なパネル切り替えがサポートされてもよい。また、バリエーションとして、CORESETPoolIndexが1つ/複数のSRSリソースセットと関連付けられるどうかが、例えば上位レイヤシグナリングによって設定されてもよい。
(Option 2-1)
X (X is greater than 2) CB/NCB SRS resource sets may be configured. The association between CORESETPoolIndex and the SRS resource set may be set statically or semi-statically. For example, dynamic panel switching may be supported by applying the above-mentioned embodiment 5-1. In addition, as a variation, whether CORESETPoolIndex is associated with one/multiple SRS resource sets may be set by, for example, upper layer signaling.

 また、CORESETPoolIndexとSRSリソースセットとの関連付けは、CORESETPoolIndexの順序とSRSリソースセットインジケータの順序に基づいてもよい。 In addition, the association between CORESETPoolIndex and SRS resource sets may be based on the order of CORESETPoolIndex and the order of SRS resource set indicators.

(オプション2-2)
 M個(MはX以上)のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットが設定されてよい。関連する1つ/複数のSRSリソースセットは、動的なパネル切り替えをサポートするため、実施形態5-2/5-3と同様に、SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールド(を含むDCI/MAC CE)によって動的に指示されてもよい。オプション2-2では、1つのCORESETPoolIndexに対して複数のSRSリソースセットが指示/関連付けられてよい。
(Option 2-2)
M (M is equal to or greater than X) SRS resource sets of CB/NCB may be configured. In order to support dynamic panel switching, one/more associated SRS resource sets may be dynamically indicated by (DCI/MAC CE including) the SRS resource set indicator field, as in the case of embodiment 5-2/5-3. In option 2-2, multiple SRS resource sets may be indicated/associated with one CORESETPoolIndex.

《変形例》
 CORESETPoolIndexが1つ/複数のSRSリソースセットと関連付けられるかどうかは、例えば上位レイヤシグナリングによって、準静的に設定されてよい。
<<Variation>>
Whether a CORESETPoolIndex is associated with one/multiple SRS resource sets may be semi-statically configured, for example, by higher layer signaling.

《具体例》
 図27は、第6の実施形態に係る複数パネルをサポートするシナリオの一例を示す図である。図27は、上述したオプション1に対応し、UEが3つのパネルを利用して3つのTRPに向けてUL送信する例を示す。
<<Example>>
Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment, which corresponds to the above-mentioned option 1 and shows an example in which a UE uses three panels for UL transmission to three TRPs.

 図27に示すように、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4である。パネル#0~#2は、それぞれSRSリソースセット#0~#2に関連付けられている。 As shown in Figure 27, the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. Panels #0 to #2 are associated with SRS resource sets #0 to #2, respectively.

 TRP#0~#2は、それぞれCORESETPoolIndex#0/#1/#2に関連付けられている。 TRP#0 to #2 are associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0/#1/#2 respectively.

 UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#2からTRP#2に向けてUL送信を行う。 The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.

 図28は、第6の実施形態に係る複数パネルをサポートするシナリオの他の一例を示す図である。図28は、上述したオプション2に対応し、UEが3つのパネルを利用して3つのTRPに向けてUL送信する例を示す。 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of a scenario supporting multiple panels according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 28 corresponds to the above-mentioned option 2, and shows an example in which a UE uses three panels to transmit UL to three TRPs.

 図28に示すように、3つのパネル(パネル#0~#2)のそれぞれのSRSポート数は、2,2,4である。パネル#0~#2は、それぞれSRSリソースセット#0~#2に関連付けられている。 As shown in FIG. 28, the number of SRS ports on each of the three panels (panels #0 to #2) is 2, 2, and 4. Panels #0 to #2 are associated with SRS resource sets #0 to #2, respectively.

 TRP#0は、CORESETPoolIndex#0に関連付けられている。TRP#1/#2は、共にCORESETPoolIndex#1に関連付けられている。 TRP#0 is associated with CORESETPoolIndex#0. TRP#1/#2 are both associated with CORESETPoolIndex#1.

 UEは、パネル#0からTRP#0に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#1からTRP#1に向けてUL送信を行い、パネル#2からTRP#2に向けてUL送信を行う。 The UE performs UL transmission from panel #0 to TRP #0, UL transmission from panel #1 to TRP #1, and UL transmission from panel #2 to TRP #2.

 以上説明した第6の実施形態によれば、マルチDCIベースのUL送信において、2以上のパネルをサポートすることができる。 According to the sixth embodiment described above, two or more panels can be supported in multi-DCI-based UL transmission.

<補足>
[UEへの情報の通知]
 上述の実施形態における(ネットワーク(Network(NW))(例えば、基地局(Base Station(BS)))から)UEへの任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSからの任意の情報の受信)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、DCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PDCCH、PDSCH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<Additional Information>
[Notification of information to UE]
In the above-described embodiment, any information may be notified to the UE (from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS))) (in other words, any information is received from the BS by the UE) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.

 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たな論理チャネルID(Logical Channel ID(LCID))がMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 When the above notification is performed by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including in the MAC subheader a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) that is not specified in existing standards.

 上記通知がDCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、当該DCIの特定のフィールド、当該DCIに付与される巡回冗長検査(Cyclic Redundancy Check(CRC))ビットのスクランブルに用いられる無線ネットワーク一時識別子(Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI))、当該DCIのフォーマットなどによって行われてもよい。 When the notification is made by a DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.

 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEへの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of any information to the UE in the above-mentioned embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.

[UEからの情報の通知]
 上述の実施形態におけるUEから(NWへ)の任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSへの任意の情報の送信/報告)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、UCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PUCCH、PUSCH、PRACH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
[Information notification from UE]
In the above-described embodiments, notification of any information from the UE (to the NW) (in other words, transmission/report of any information from the UE to the BS) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.

 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たなLCIDがMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.

 上記通知がUCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、PUCCH又はPUSCHを用いて送信されてもよい。 If the notification is made by UCI, the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.

 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEからの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiments, notification of any information from the UE may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.

[各実施形態の適用について]
 上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、特定の条件を満たす場合に適用されてもよい。当該特定の条件は、規格において規定されてもよいし、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングを用いてUE/BSに通知されてもよい。
[Application of each embodiment]
At least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when a certain condition is satisfied, which may be specified in a standard or may be notified to the UE/BS using higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.

 上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、特定のUE能力(UE capability)を報告した又は当該特定のUE能力をサポートするUEに対してのみ適用されてもよい。 At least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied only to UEs that have reported or support a particular UE capability.

 当該特定のUE能力は、以下の少なくとも1つを示してもよい:
 ・上記実施形態の少なくとも1つについての特定の処理/動作/制御/情報をサポートすること。
 ・STxMP(動作/スキーム)をサポートすること。
 ・TDM/SDM/SFNを利用したUL送信をサポートすること。
 ・複数の非対称/対称パネルをサポートすること。
 ・2以上のパネルを有するシングルDCI マルチTRP TDM繰り返し送信をサポートすること。
 ・2以上のパネルを有するシングルDCI マルチTRP STxMPをサポートすること。
 ・2以上のパネルを有するマルチDCI マルチTRP STxMPをサポートすること。
 ・2以上のCB/NCBのSRSリソースセットをサポートすること。
 ・2以上のCORESETPoolIndexをサポートすること。
The specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following:
- Supporting specific processing/operations/control/information for at least one of the above embodiments.
Support STxMP (operations/schemes).
Support UL transmission using TDM/SDM/SFN.
Support multiple asymmetric/symmetric panels.
Support single DCI multi-TRP TDM repeat transmission with more than two panels.
Support single DCI multi-TRP STxMP with 2 or more panels.
Support multi-DCI multi-TRP STxMP with 2 or more panels.
Supporting SRS resource sets of two or more CBs/NCBs.
- Supports CORESETPoolIndex of 2 or more.

 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全周波数にわたって(周波数に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、周波数(例えば、セル、バンド、バンドコンビネーション、BWP、コンポーネントキャリアなどの1つ又はこれらの組み合わせ)ごとの能力であってもよいし、周波数レンジ(例えば、Frequency Range 1(FR1)、FR2、FR3、FR4、FR5、FR2-1、FR2-2)ごとの能力であってもよいし、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))ごとの能力であってもよいし、Feature Set(FS)又はFeature Set Per Component-carrier(FSPC)ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities per frequency (e.g., one or a combination of a cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities per frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities per subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities per Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC).

 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全複信方式にわたって(複信方式に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、複信方式(例えば、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))、周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD)))ごとの能力であってもよい。 The above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).

 また、上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つは、UEが上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングによって、上述の実施形態に関連する特定の情報(又は上述の実施形態の動作を実施すること)を設定/アクティベート/トリガされた場合に適用されてもよい。例えば、当該特定の情報は、特定のSTxMPスキームを有効化することを示す情報、特定のリリース(例えば、Rel.18/19)向けの任意のRRCパラメータなどであってもよい。 Furthermore, at least one of the above-mentioned embodiments may be applied when the UE configures/activates/triggers specific information related to the above-mentioned embodiments (or performs the operations of the above-mentioned embodiments) by higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling. For example, the specific information may be information indicating the activation of a specific STxMP scheme, any RRC parameters for a specific release (e.g., Rel. 18/19), etc.

 UEは、上記特定のUE能力の少なくとも1つをサポートしない又は上記特定の情報を設定されない場合、例えばRel.15/16の動作を適用してもよい。 If the UE does not support at least one of the above specific UE capabilities or the above specific information is not configured, the UE may, for example, apply Rel. 15/16 operations.

(付記)
 本開示の一実施形態(第1/第2の実施形態)に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信する受信部と、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御する制御部と、を有し、
 切り替え前後のパネル同士は、非対称パネルを構成する、端末。
[付記2]
 前記非対称パネルを構成する複数のパネルは、測定用参照信号(SRS)ポートの最大数、SRSリソースの最大数、最大ランク、フルパワーモード、コードブックサブセット、コヒーレントタイプの少なくとも1つについて異なる能力を有する、付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記UL送信は、単一の下りリンク制御情報(シングルDCI)ベースの時間分割多重(TDM)を利用したUL繰り返し送信、及び単一の下りリンク制御情報(シングルDCI)ベースの空間分割多重(SDM)もしくは単一周波数ネットワーク(SFN)を利用した同時UL送信のいずれかである、付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記受信部は、前記UL送信の切り替えの指示を下りリンク制御情報(DCI)を用いて受信する、付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are added regarding one embodiment (first/second embodiment) of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
a receiver for receiving an instruction to switch to an uplink (UL) transmission utilizing a plurality of panels;
a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of the switching,
The panels before and after the switch form an asymmetric panel on the terminal.
[Appendix 2]
The terminal of claim 1, wherein the multiple panels constituting the asymmetric panel have different capabilities for at least one of a maximum number of measurement reference signal (SRS) ports, a maximum number of SRS resources, a maximum rank, a full power mode, a codebook subset, and a coherent type.
[Appendix 3]
3. The terminal of claim 1, wherein the UL transmission is either a UL repeated transmission using a single DCI-based time division multiplexing (TDM) and a simultaneous UL transmission using a single DCI-based space division multiplexing (SDM) or a single frequency network (SFN).
[Appendix 4]
4. The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the receiving unit receives the instruction to switch the UL transmission using downlink control information (DCI).

(付記)
 本開示の一実施形態(第3/第4の実施形態)に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信する受信部と、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御する制御部と、を有し、
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含む、端末。
[付記2]
 前記制御部は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のSRSリソースセットに対応する特定のパラメータを更新する、付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記制御部は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のパネルに対応するSRSリソースセットを、切り替え先のパネルに関連付けられるSRSリソースセットに切り替える、付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記受信部は、前記UL送信の切り替えの指示を下りリンク制御情報(DCI)を用いて受信し、
 前記DCIは、サポートされる最大パネル数に応じたSRSリソースインジケータフィールド、又は送信プリコーディング行列指標(TPMI)フィールドを含む、付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are added regarding one embodiment (third/fourth embodiment) of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
a receiver for receiving an instruction to switch to an uplink (UL) transmission utilizing a plurality of panels;
a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of the switching,
The switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.
[Appendix 2]
The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit updates a specific parameter corresponding to an SRS resource set before switching based on the information.
[Appendix 3]
The terminal according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control unit switches an SRS resource set corresponding to a panel before switching to an SRS resource set associated with a panel to be switched to, based on the information.
[Appendix 4]
The receiving unit receives an instruction to switch the UL transmission using downlink control information (DCI);
The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the DCI includes an SRS resource indicator field according to a maximum number of panels supported, or a transmit precoding matrix index (TPMI) field.

(付記)
 本開示の一実施形態(第5/第6の実施形態)に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 複数のパネルを利用する複数の下りリンク制御情報(マルチDCI)ベースの上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信する受信部と、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御する制御部と、を有し、
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる送受信ポイント(TRP)に関する情報を含む、端末。
[付記2]
 前記受信部は、前記情報を含む下りリンク制御情報又は、MAC制御要素を受信する、付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含み、
 前記制御部は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のパネルに対応するSRSリソースセットを、切り替え先のパネルに関連付けられるSRSリソースセットに切り替える、付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記情報は、特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットインジケータフィールドを含み、
 当該SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、あるSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる特定のUL送信を示す、付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are added regarding one embodiment (fifth/sixth embodiment) of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
A receiver for receiving an instruction to switch to a multiple downlink control information (multiple DCI) based uplink (UL) transmission using a plurality of panels;
a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of the switching,
The terminal, wherein the switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a transmission/reception point (TRP) associated with the specific panel.
[Appendix 2]
The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the receiving unit receives downlink control information or a MAC control element including the information.
[Appendix 3]
The switching instruction includes information regarding a particular panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the particular panel;
The terminal according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control unit switches an SRS resource set corresponding to a panel before switching to an SRS resource set associated with a panel to be switched to, based on the information.
[Appendix 4]
The information includes a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set indicator field associated with a particular panel;
4. The terminal of claim 1, wherein the SRS resource set indicator field indicates a particular UL transmission associated with an SRS resource set.

(無線通信システム)
 以下、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの構成について説明する。この無線通信システムでは、本開示の上記各実施形態に係る無線通信方法のいずれか又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて通信が行われる。
(Wireless communication system)
A configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below. In this wireless communication system, communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination of these methods.

 図29は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。無線通信システム1(単にシステム1と呼ばれてもよい)は、Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP)によって仕様化されるLong Term Evolution(LTE)、5th generation mobile communication system New Radio(5G NR)などを用いて通信を実現するシステムであってもよい。 FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment. The wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that realizes communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.

 また、無線通信システム1は、複数のRadio Access Technology(RAT)間のデュアルコネクティビティ(マルチRATデュアルコネクティビティ(Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity(MR-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。MR-DCは、LTE(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access(E-UTRA))とNRとのデュアルコネクティビティ(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity(EN-DC))、NRとLTEとのデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity(NE-DC))などを含んでもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)). MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.

 EN-DCでは、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がマスタノード(Master Node(MN))であり、NRの基地局(gNB)がセカンダリノード(Secondary Node(SN))である。NE-DCでは、NRの基地局(gNB)がMNであり、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がSNである。 In EN-DC, the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN). In NE-DC, the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.

 無線通信システム1は、同一のRAT内の複数の基地局間のデュアルコネクティビティ(例えば、MN及びSNの双方がNRの基地局(gNB)であるデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-NR Dual Connectivity(NN-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (e.g., dual connectivity in which both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).

 無線通信システム1は、比較的カバレッジの広いマクロセルC1を形成する基地局11と、マクロセルC1内に配置され、マクロセルC1よりも狭いスモールセルC2を形成する基地局12(12a-12c)と、を備えてもよい。ユーザ端末20は、少なくとも1つのセル内に位置してもよい。各セル及びユーザ端末20の配置、数などは、図に示す態様に限定されない。以下、基地局11及び12を区別しない場合は、基地局10と総称する。 The wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with a relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are arranged within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is narrower than the macrocell C1. A user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The arrangement and number of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the embodiment shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between the base stations 11 and 12, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.

 ユーザ端末20は、複数の基地局10のうち、少なくとも1つに接続してもよい。ユーザ端末20は、複数のコンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))を用いたキャリアアグリゲーション(Carrier Aggregation(CA))及びデュアルコネクティビティ(DC)の少なくとも一方を利用してもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10. The user terminal 20 may utilize at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).

 各CCは、第1の周波数帯(Frequency Range 1(FR1))及び第2の周波数帯(Frequency Range 2(FR2))の少なくとも1つに含まれてもよい。マクロセルC1はFR1に含まれてもよいし、スモールセルC2はFR2に含まれてもよい。例えば、FR1は、6GHz以下の周波数帯(サブ6GHz(sub-6GHz))であってもよいし、FR2は、24GHzよりも高い周波数帯(above-24GHz)であってもよい。なお、FR1及びFR2の周波数帯、定義などはこれらに限られず、例えばFR1がFR2よりも高い周波数帯に該当してもよい。 Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)). Macro cell C1 may be included in FR1, and small cell C2 may be included in FR2. For example, FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz), and FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.

 また、ユーザ端末20は、各CCにおいて、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))及び周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))の少なくとも1つを用いて通信を行ってもよい。 In addition, the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) in each CC.

 複数の基地局10は、有線(例えば、Common Public Radio Interface(CPRI)に準拠した光ファイバ、X2インターフェースなど)又は無線(例えば、NR通信)によって接続されてもよい。例えば、基地局11及び12間においてNR通信がバックホールとして利用される場合、上位局に該当する基地局11はIntegrated Access Backhaul(IAB)ドナー、中継局(リレー)に該当する基地局12はIABノードと呼ばれてもよい。 The multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber conforming to the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2 interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication). For example, when NR communication is used as a backhaul between base stations 11 and 12, base station 11, which corresponds to the upper station, may be called an Integrated Access Backhaul (IAB) donor, and base station 12, which corresponds to a relay station, may be called an IAB node.

 基地局10は、他の基地局10を介して、又は直接コアネットワーク30に接続されてもよい。コアネットワーク30は、例えば、Evolved Packet Core(EPC)、5G Core Network(5GCN)、Next Generation Core(NGC)などの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 via another base station 10 or directly. The core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.

 コアネットワーク30は、例えば、User Plane Function(UPF)、Access and Mobility management Function(AMF)、Session Management Function(SMF)、Unified Data Management(UDM)、Application Function(AF)、Data Network(DN)、Location Management Function(LMF)、保守運用管理(Operation、Administration and Maintenance(Management)(OAM))などのネットワーク機能(Network Functions(NF))を含んでもよい。なお、1つのネットワークノードによって複数の機能が提供されてもよい。また、DNを介して外部ネットワーク(例えば、インターネット)との通信が行われてもよい。 The core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM). Note that multiple functions may be provided by one network node. In addition, communication with an external network (e.g., the Internet) may be performed via the DN.

 ユーザ端末20は、LTE、LTE-A、5Gなどの通信方式の少なくとも1つに対応した端末であってもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.

 無線通信システム1においては、直交周波数分割多重(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM))ベースの無線アクセス方式が利用されてもよい。例えば、下りリンク(Downlink(DL))及び上りリンク(Uplink(UL))の少なくとも一方において、Cyclic Prefix OFDM(CP-OFDM)、Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM(DFT-s-OFDM)、Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access(OFDMA)、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)などが利用されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) may be used. For example, in at least one of the downlink (DL) and uplink (UL), Cyclic Prefix OFDM (CP-OFDM), Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM (DFT-s-OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), etc. may be used.

 無線アクセス方式は、波形(waveform)と呼ばれてもよい。なお、無線通信システム1においては、UL及びDLの無線アクセス方式には、他の無線アクセス方式(例えば、他のシングルキャリア伝送方式、他のマルチキャリア伝送方式)が用いられてもよい。 The radio access method may also be called a waveform. Note that in the wireless communication system 1, other radio access methods (e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods) may be used for the UL and DL radio access methods.

 無線通信システム1では、下りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される下り共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、ブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))、下り制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))などが用いられてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), etc. may be used as the downlink channel.

 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上り制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))、ランダムアクセスチャネル(Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH))などが用いられてもよい。 In addition, in the wireless communication system 1, an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.

 PDSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報、System Information Block(SIB)などが伝送される。PUSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報などが伝送されてもよい。また、PBCHによって、Master Information Block(MIB)が伝送されてもよい。 User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc. are transmitted via PDSCH. User data, upper layer control information, etc. may also be transmitted via PUSCH. Furthermore, Master Information Block (MIB) may also be transmitted via PBCH.

 PDCCHによって、下位レイヤ制御情報が伝送されてもよい。下位レイヤ制御情報は、例えば、PDSCH及びPUSCHの少なくとも一方のスケジューリング情報を含む下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))を含んでもよい。 Lower layer control information may be transmitted by the PDCCH. The lower layer control information may include, for example, downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and the PUSCH.

 なお、PDSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、DLアサインメント、DL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよいし、PUSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、ULグラント、UL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよい。なお、PDSCHはDLデータで読み替えられてもよいし、PUSCHはULデータで読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH may be called a DL assignment or DL DCI, and the DCI for scheduling the PUSCH may be called a UL grant or UL DCI. Note that the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data, and the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.

 PDCCHの検出には、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))及びサーチスペース(search space)が利用されてもよい。CORESETは、DCIをサーチするリソースに対応する。サーチスペースは、PDCCH候補(PDCCH candidates)のサーチ領域及びサーチ方法に対応する。1つのCORESETは、1つ又は複数のサーチスペースに関連付けられてもよい。UEは、サーチスペース設定に基づいて、あるサーチスペースに関連するCORESETをモニタしてもよい。 A control resource set (COntrol REsource SET (CORESET)) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH. The CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI. The search space corresponds to the search region and search method of PDCCH candidates. One CORESET may be associated with one or multiple search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a search space based on the search space configuration.

 1つのサーチスペースは、1つ又は複数のアグリゲーションレベル(aggregation Level)に該当するPDCCH候補に対応してもよい。1つ又は複数のサーチスペースは、サーチスペースセットと呼ばれてもよい。なお、本開示の「サーチスペース」、「サーチスペースセット」、「サーチスペース設定」、「サーチスペースセット設定」、「CORESET」、「CORESET設定」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 A search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels. One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that the terms "search space," "search space set," "search space setting," "search space set setting," "CORESET," "CORESET setting," etc. in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.

 PUCCHによって、チャネル状態情報(Channel State Information(CSI))、送達確認情報(例えば、Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement(HARQ-ACK)、ACK/NACKなどと呼ばれてもよい)及びスケジューリングリクエスト(Scheduling Request(SR))の少なくとも1つを含む上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))が伝送されてもよい。PRACHによって、セルとの接続確立のためのランダムアクセスプリアンブルが伝送されてもよい。 The PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and a scheduling request (SR). The PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.

 なお、本開示において下りリンク、上りリンクなどは「リンク」を付けずに表現されてもよい。また、各種チャネルの先頭に「物理(Physical)」を付けずに表現されてもよい。 Note that in this disclosure, downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding "link." Also, various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical" to the beginning.

 無線通信システム1では、同期信号(Synchronization Signal(SS))、下りリンク参照信号(Downlink Reference Signal(DL-RS))などが伝送されてもよい。無線通信システム1では、DL-RSとして、セル固有参照信号(Cell-specific Reference Signal(CRS))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))、位置決定参照信号(Positioning Reference Signal(PRS))、位相トラッキング参照信号(Phase Tracking Reference Signal(PTRS))などが伝送されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted. In the wireless communication system 1, as the DL-RS, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.

 同期信号は、例えば、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))及びセカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS(PSS、SSS)及びPBCH(及びPBCH用のDMRS)を含む信号ブロックは、SS/PBCHブロック、SS Block(SSB)などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、SS、SSBなども、参照信号と呼ばれてもよい。 The synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS). A signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for PBCH) may be called an SS/PBCH block, an SS Block (SSB), etc. In addition, the SS, SSB, etc. may also be called a reference signal.

 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンク参照信号(Uplink Reference Signal(UL-RS))として、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、復調用参照信号(DMRS)などが伝送されてもよい。なお、DMRSはユーザ端末固有参照信号(UE-specific Reference Signal)と呼ばれてもよい。 In addition, in the wireless communication system 1, a measurement reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS). Note that the DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).

(基地局)
 図30は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。基地局10は、制御部110、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース(transmission line interface)140を備えている。なお、制御部110、送受信部120及び送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(Base station)
30 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. The base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140 may be provided.

 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、基地局10は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the base station 10 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.

 制御部110は、基地局10全体の制御を実施する。制御部110は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10. The control unit 110 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.

 制御部110は、信号の生成、スケジューリング(例えば、リソース割り当て、マッピング)などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列(sequence)などを生成し、送受信部120に転送してもよい。制御部110は、通信チャネルの呼処理(設定、解放など)、基地局10の状態管理、無線リソースの管理などを行ってもよい。 The control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc. The control unit 110 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurement, etc. The control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120. The control unit 110 may perform call processing of communication channels (setting, release, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.

 送受信部120は、ベースバンド(baseband)部121、Radio Frequency(RF)部122、測定部123を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部121は、送信処理部1211及び受信処理部1212を含んでもよい。送受信部120は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ(phase shifter)、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123. The baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212. The transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.

 送受信部120は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部1211、RF部122から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部1212、RF部122、測定部123から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver, or may be composed of a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122. The receiver may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.

 送受信アンテナ130は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting/receiving antenna 130 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.

 送受信部120は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。送受信部120は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 120 may receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.

 送受信部120は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.

 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、例えば制御部110から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP)レイヤの処理、Radio Link Control(RLC)レイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、Medium Access Control(MAC)レイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data and control information obtained from the control unit 110 to generate a bit string to be transmitted.

 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、離散フーリエ変換(Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT))処理(必要に応じて)、逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform(IFFT))処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.

 送受信部120(RF部122)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ130を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.

 一方、送受信部120(RF部122)は、送受信アンテナ130によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.

 送受信部120(受信処理部1212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform(FFT))処理、逆離散フーリエ変換(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform(IDFT))処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (reception processing unit 1212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, and acquire user data, etc.

 送受信部120(測定部123)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部123は、受信した信号に基づいて、Radio Resource Management(RRM)測定、Channel State Information(CSI)測定などを行ってもよい。測定部123は、受信電力(例えば、Reference Signal Received Power(RSRP))、受信品質(例えば、Reference Signal Received Quality(RSRQ)、Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio(SINR)、Signal to Noise Ratio(SNR))、信号強度(例えば、Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI))、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部110に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 120 (measurement unit 123) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.

 伝送路インターフェース140は、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)、他の基地局10などとの間で信号を送受信(バックホールシグナリング)し、ユーザ端末20のためのユーザデータ(ユーザプレーンデータ)、制御プレーンデータなどを取得、伝送などしてもよい。 The transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.

 なお、本開示における基地局10の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 Note that the transmitting section and receiving section of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured with at least one of the transmitting/receiving section 120, the transmitting/receiving antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.

 送受信部120は、複数のパネルを利用する端末からの上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を送信してもよい。送受信部120は、端末が複数のパネルを利用する複数の下りリンク制御情報(マルチDCI)ベースの上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を送信してもよい。送受信部120は、前記切り替えの指示に基づいて切り替えられたパネルを利用した前記端末からの上りリンク送信を受信してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may transmit a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission from a terminal using multiple panels. The transceiver 120 may transmit a switching instruction for multiple downlink control information (multiple DCI)-based uplink (UL) transmission in which a terminal uses multiple panels. The transceiver 120 may receive uplink transmission from the terminal using the panel switched based on the switching instruction.

 制御部110は、前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを判断してもよい。 The control unit 110 may determine panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction.

(ユーザ端末)
 図31は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。ユーザ端末20は、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を備えている。なお、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(User terminal)
31 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. The user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transmitting/receiving unit 220, and a transmitting/receiving antenna 230. Note that one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transmitting/receiving unit 220, and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230 may be provided.

 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、ユーザ端末20は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks of the characteristic parts of this embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also be assumed to have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each part described below may be omitted.

 制御部210は、ユーザ端末20全体の制御を実施する。制御部210は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20. The control unit 210 can be configured from a controller, a control circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.

 制御部210は、信号の生成、マッピングなどを制御してもよい。制御部210は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部210は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列などを生成し、送受信部220に転送してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc. The control unit 210 may control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 220 and the transceiver antenna 230, measurement, etc. The control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 220.

 送受信部220は、ベースバンド部221、RF部222、測定部223を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部221は、送信処理部2211、受信処理部2212を含んでもよい。送受信部220は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223. The baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212. The transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on a common understanding in the technical field to which the present disclosure relates.

 送受信部220は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部2211、RF部222から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部2212、RF部222、測定部223から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver, or may be composed of a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222. The receiver may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.

 送受信アンテナ230は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting/receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.

 送受信部220は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。送受信部220は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 220 may transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.

 送受信部220は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.

 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、例えば制御部210から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、PDCPレイヤの処理、RLCレイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、MACレイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (transmission processor 2211) may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on the data and control information acquired from the controller 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.

 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、DFT処理(必要に応じて)、IFFT処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (transmission processor 2211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.

 なお、DFT処理を適用するか否かは、トランスフォームプリコーディングの設定に基づいてもよい。送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、あるチャネル(例えば、PUSCH)について、トランスフォームプリコーディングが有効(enabled)である場合、当該チャネルをDFT-s-OFDM波形を用いて送信するために上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行ってもよいし、そうでない場合、上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行わなくてもよい。 Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings of transform precoding. When transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing in order to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform, and when transform precoding is not enabled, it is not necessary to perform DFT processing as the above-mentioned transmission processing.

 送受信部220(RF部222)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ230を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc., on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.

 一方、送受信部220(RF部222)は、送受信アンテナ230によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.

 送受信部220(受信処理部2212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、FFT処理、IDFT処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver 220 (reception processor 2212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.

 送受信部220(測定部223)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部223は、受信した信号に基づいて、RRM測定、CSI測定などを行ってもよい。測定部223は、受信電力(例えば、RSRP)、受信品質(例えば、RSRQ、SINR、SNR)、信号強度(例えば、RSSI)、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部210に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 220 (measurement unit 223) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.

 なお、測定部223は、チャネル測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のためのチャネル測定を導出してもよい。チャネル測定用リソースは、例えば、ノンゼロパワー(Non Zero Power(NZP))CSI-RSリソースであってもよい。また、測定部223は、干渉測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のための干渉測定を導出してもよい。干渉測定用リソースは、干渉測定用のNZP CSI-RSリソース、CSI-干渉測定(Interference Measurement(IM))リソースなどの少なくとも1つであってもよい。なお、CSI-IMは、CSI-干渉管理(Interference Management(IM))と呼ばれてもよいし、ゼロパワー(Zero Power(ZP))CSI-RSと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、CSI-RS、NZP CSI-RS、ZP CSI-RS、CSI-IM、CSI-SSBなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 The measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources. The channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources. The measurement unit 223 may derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources. The interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc. CSI-IM may be called CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS. In this disclosure, CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be read as interchangeable.

 なお、本開示におけるユーザ端末20の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 In addition, the transmitting unit and receiving unit of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitting/receiving unit 220 and the transmitting/receiving antenna 230.

 送受信部220は、複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信してもよい。送受信部220は、複数のパネルを利用する複数の下りリンク制御情報(マルチDCI)ベースの上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信してもよい。送受信部220は、前記UL送信の切り替えの指示を下りリンク制御情報(DCI)又は、MAC制御要素を用いて受信してもよい。 The transceiver 220 may receive an instruction to switch to uplink (UL) transmission using multiple panels. The transceiver 220 may receive an instruction to switch to uplink (UL) transmission based on multiple downlink control information (multiple DCI) using multiple panels. The transceiver 220 may receive the instruction to switch the UL transmission using downlink control information (DCI) or a MAC control element.

 切り替え前後のパネル同士は、非対称パネルを構成してもよい。前記非対称パネルを構成する複数のパネルは、測定用参照信号(SRS)ポートの最大数、SRSリソースの最大数、最大ランク、フルパワーモード、コードブックサブセット、コヒーレントタイプの少なくとも1つについて異なる能力を有してもよい。前記UL送信は、単一の下りリンク制御情報(シングルDCI)ベースの時間分割多重(TDM)を利用したUL繰り返し送信、及び単一の下りリンク制御情報(シングルDCI)ベースの空間分割多重(SDM)もしくは単一周波数ネットワーク(SFN)を利用した同時UL送信のいずれかであってよい。前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含んでよい。前記DCIは、サポートされる最大パネル数に応じたSRSリソースインジケータフィールド、又は送信プリコーディング行列指標(TPMI)フィールドを含んでよい。前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる送受信ポイント(TRP)に関する情報を含んでよい。前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含んでよい。前記SRSリソースセットインジケータフィールドは、あるSRSリソースセットと関連付けられる特定のUL送信を示してよい。 The panels before and after the switching may form an asymmetric panel. The multiple panels forming the asymmetric panel may have different capabilities for at least one of the maximum number of measurement reference signal (SRS) ports, the maximum number of SRS resources, the maximum rank, the full power mode, the codebook subset, and the coherent type. The UL transmission may be either UL repeated transmission using single downlink control information (single DCI) based time division multiplexing (TDM), or simultaneous UL transmission using single downlink control information (single DCI) based space division multiplexing (SDM) or single frequency network (SFN). The switching instruction may include information on a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel. The DCI may include an SRS resource indicator field according to the maximum number of panels supported, or a transmit precoding matrix index (TPMI) field. The switching instruction may include information on a specific panel and a transmit/receive point (TRP) associated with the specific panel. The switching indication may include information regarding a particular panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the particular panel. The SRS resource set indicator field may indicate a particular UL transmission associated with an SRS resource set.

 制御部210は、前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御してもよい。制御部210は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のSRSリソースセットに対応する特定のパラメータを更新してもよい。制御部210は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のパネルに対応するSRSリソースセットを、切り替え先のパネルに関連付けられるSRSリソースセットに切り替えてもよい。 The control unit 210 may control the panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the switching instruction. The control unit 210 may update a specific parameter corresponding to the SRS resource set before the switching based on the information. The control unit 210 may switch the SRS resource set corresponding to the panel before the switching to the SRS resource set associated with the panel to which the switching is to be performed based on the information.

(ハードウェア構成)
 なお、上記実施形態の説明に用いたブロック図は、機能単位のブロックを示している。これらの機能ブロック(構成部)は、ハードウェア及びソフトウェアの少なくとも一方の任意の組み合わせによって実現される。また、各機能ブロックの実現方法は特に限定されない。すなわち、各機能ブロックは、物理的又は論理的に結合した1つの装置を用いて実現されてもよいし、物理的又は論理的に分離した2つ以上の装置を直接的又は間接的に(例えば、有線、無線などを用いて)接続し、これら複数の装置を用いて実現されてもよい。機能ブロックは、上記1つの装置又は上記複数の装置にソフトウェアを組み合わせて実現されてもよい。
(Hardware configuration)
The block diagrams used in the description of the above embodiments show functional blocks. These functional blocks (components) are realized by any combination of at least one of hardware and software. The method of realizing each functional block is not particularly limited. That is, each functional block may be realized using one device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more devices that are physically or logically separated and directly or indirectly connected (for example, using wires, wirelessly, etc.). The functional blocks may be realized by combining the one device or the multiple devices with software.

 ここで、機能には、判断、決定、判定、計算、算出、処理、導出、調査、探索、確認、受信、送信、出力、アクセス、解決、選択、選定、確立、比較、想定、期待、みなし、報知(broadcasting)、通知(notifying)、通信(communicating)、転送(forwarding)、構成(configuring)、再構成(reconfiguring)、割り当て(allocating、mapping)、割り振り(assigning)などがあるが、これらに限られない。例えば、送信を機能させる機能ブロック(構成部)は、送信部(transmitting unit)、送信機(transmitter)などと呼称されてもよい。いずれも、上述したとおり、実現方法は特に限定されない。 Here, the functions include, but are not limited to, judgement, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, selection, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment. For example, a functional block (component) that performs the transmission function may be called a transmitting unit, a transmitter, and the like. In either case, as mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on the method of realization.

 例えば、本開示の一実施形態における基地局、ユーザ端末などは、本開示の無線通信方法の処理を行うコンピュータとして機能してもよい。図32は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、物理的には、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002、ストレージ1003、通信装置1004、入力装置1005、出力装置1006、バス1007などを含むコンピュータ装置として構成されてもよい。 For example, a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment. The above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, a memory 1002, a storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.

 なお、本開示において、装置、回路、デバイス、部(section)、ユニットなどの文言は、互いに読み替えることができる。基地局10及びユーザ端末20のハードウェア構成は、図に示した各装置を1つ又は複数含むように構成されてもよいし、一部の装置を含まずに構成されてもよい。 In addition, in this disclosure, terms such as apparatus, circuit, device, section, and unit may be interpreted as interchangeable. The hardware configurations of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.

 例えば、プロセッサ1001は1つだけ図示されているが、複数のプロセッサがあってもよい。また、処理は、1のプロセッサによって実行されてもよいし、処理が同時に、逐次に、又はその他の手法を用いて、2以上のプロセッサによって実行されてもよい。なお、プロセッサ1001は、1以上のチップによって実装されてもよい。 For example, although only one processor 1001 is shown, there may be multiple processors. Furthermore, processing may be performed by one processor, or processing may be performed by two or more processors simultaneously, sequentially, or using other techniques. Furthermore, the processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.

 基地局10及びユーザ端末20における各機能は、例えば、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などのハードウェア上に所定のソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み込ませることによって、プロセッサ1001が演算を行い、通信装置1004を介する通信を制御したり、メモリ1002及びストレージ1003におけるデータの読み出し及び書き込みの少なくとも一方を制御したりすることによって実現される。 The functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of the reading and writing of data in the memory 1002 and storage 1003.

 プロセッサ1001は、例えば、オペレーティングシステムを動作させてコンピュータ全体を制御する。プロセッサ1001は、周辺装置とのインターフェース、制御装置、演算装置、レジスタなどを含む中央処理装置(Central Processing Unit(CPU))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の制御部110(210)、送受信部120(220)などの少なくとも一部は、プロセッサ1001によって実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001, for example, operates an operating system to control the entire computer. The processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) including an interface with peripheral devices, a control device, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc. For example, at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transmission/reception unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.

 また、プロセッサ1001は、プログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュール、データなどを、ストレージ1003及び通信装置1004の少なくとも一方からメモリ1002に読み出し、これらに従って各種の処理を実行する。プログラムとしては、上述の実施形態において説明した動作の少なくとも一部をコンピュータに実行させるプログラムが用いられる。例えば、制御部110(210)は、メモリ1002に格納され、プロセッサ1001において動作する制御プログラムによって実現されてもよく、他の機能ブロックについても同様に実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001 also reads out programs (program codes), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes according to these. The programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above embodiments. For example, the control unit 110 (210) may be realized by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be made for other functional blocks.

 メモリ1002は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、Read Only Memory(ROM)、Erasable Programmable ROM(EPROM)、Electrically EPROM(EEPROM)、Random Access Memory(RAM)、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。メモリ1002は、レジスタ、キャッシュ、メインメモリ(主記憶装置)などと呼ばれてもよい。メモリ1002は、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信方法を実施するために実行可能なプログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュールなどを保存することができる。 Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of, for example, Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), and other suitable storage media. Memory 1002 may also be called a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program codes), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

 ストレージ1003は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、フレキシブルディスク、フロッピー(登録商標)ディスク、光磁気ディスク(例えば、コンパクトディスク(Compact Disc ROM(CD-ROM)など)、デジタル多用途ディスク、Blu-ray(登録商標)ディスク)、リムーバブルディスク、ハードディスクドライブ、スマートカード、フラッシュメモリデバイス(例えば、カード、スティック、キードライブ)、磁気ストライプ、データベース、サーバ、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。ストレージ1003は、補助記憶装置と呼ばれてもよい。 Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disk (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disk, a Blu-ray disk), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium. Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.

 通信装置1004は、有線ネットワーク及び無線ネットワークの少なくとも一方を介してコンピュータ間の通信を行うためのハードウェア(送受信デバイス)であり、例えばネットワークデバイス、ネットワークコントローラ、ネットワークカード、通信モジュールなどともいう。通信装置1004は、例えば周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))及び時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))の少なくとも一方を実現するために、高周波スイッチ、デュプレクサ、フィルタ、周波数シンセサイザなどを含んで構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の送受信部120(220)、送受信アンテナ130(230)などは、通信装置1004によって実現されてもよい。送受信部120(220)は、送信部120a(220a)と受信部120b(220b)とで、物理的に又は論理的に分離された実装がなされてもよい。 The communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also called, for example, a network device, a network controller, a network card, a communication module, etc. The communication device 1004 may be configured to include a high-frequency switch, a duplexer, a filter, a frequency synthesizer, etc. to realize at least one of, for example, Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD). For example, the above-mentioned transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220), transmitting/receiving antenna 130 (230), etc. may be realized by the communication device 1004. The transmitting/receiving unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitting unit 120a (220a) and a receiving unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.

 入力装置1005は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサなど)である。出力装置1006は、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、Light Emitting Diode(LED)ランプなど)である。なお、入力装置1005及び出力装置1006は、一体となった構成(例えば、タッチパネル)であってもよい。 The input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside. The output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, a speaker, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that performs output to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one structure (e.g., a touch panel).

 また、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などの各装置は、情報を通信するためのバス1007によって接続される。バス1007は、単一のバスを用いて構成されてもよいし、装置間ごとに異なるバスを用いて構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002 is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information. The bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.

 また、基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、マイクロプロセッサ、デジタル信号プロセッサ(Digital Signal Processor(DSP))、Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC)、Programmable Logic Device(PLD)、Field Programmable Gate Array(FPGA)などのハードウェアを含んで構成されてもよく、当該ハードウェアを用いて各機能ブロックの一部又は全てが実現されてもよい。例えば、プロセッサ1001は、これらのハードウェアの少なくとも1つを用いて実装されてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using the hardware. For example, the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.

(変形例)
 なお、本開示において説明した用語及び本開示の理解に必要な用語については、同一の又は類似する意味を有する用語と置き換えてもよい。例えば、チャネル、シンボル及び信号(シグナル又はシグナリング)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、信号はメッセージであってもよい。参照信号(reference signal)は、RSと略称することもでき、適用される標準によってパイロット(Pilot)、パイロット信号などと呼ばれてもよい。また、コンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))は、セル、周波数キャリア、キャリア周波数などと呼ばれてもよい。
(Modification)
In addition, the terms described in this disclosure and the terms necessary for understanding this disclosure may be replaced with terms having the same or similar meanings. For example, a channel, a symbol, and a signal (signal or signaling) may be read as mutually interchangeable. A signal may also be a message. A reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may be called a pilot, a pilot signal, or the like depending on the applied standard. A component carrier (CC) may also be called a cell, a frequency carrier, a carrier frequency, or the like.

 無線フレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数の期間(フレーム)によって構成されてもよい。無線フレームを構成する当該1つ又は複数の各期間(フレーム)は、サブフレームと呼ばれてもよい。さらに、サブフレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のスロットによって構成されてもよい。サブフレームは、ニューメロロジー(numerology)に依存しない固定の時間長(例えば、1ms)であってもよい。 A radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain. Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe. Furthermore, a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain. A subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.

 ここで、ニューメロロジーは、ある信号又はチャネルの送信及び受信の少なくとも一方に適用される通信パラメータであってもよい。ニューメロロジーは、例えば、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))、帯域幅、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス長、送信時間間隔(Transmission Time Interval(TTI))、TTIあたりのシンボル数、無線フレーム構成、送受信機が周波数領域において行う特定のフィルタリング処理、送受信機が時間領域において行う特定のウィンドウイング処理などの少なくとも1つを示してもよい。 Here, the numerology may be a communication parameter that is applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel. The numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: SubCarrier Spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, Transmission Time Interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame configuration, a specific filtering process performed by the transceiver in the frequency domain, a specific windowing process performed by the transceiver in the time domain, etc.

 スロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボル(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM)シンボル、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)シンボルなど)によって構成されてもよい。また、スロットは、ニューメロロジーに基づく時間単位であってもよい。 A slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols, etc.). A slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.

 スロットは、複数のミニスロットを含んでもよい。各ミニスロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。また、ミニスロットは、サブスロットと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットは、スロットよりも少ない数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。ミニスロットより大きい時間単位で送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプAと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットを用いて送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプBと呼ばれてもよい。 A slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or multiple symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.

 無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、いずれも信号を伝送する際の時間単位を表す。無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、それぞれに対応する別の呼称が用いられてもよい。なお、本開示におけるフレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット、シンボルなどの時間単位は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 A radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units when transmitting a signal. A different name may be used for radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol. Note that the time units such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol in this disclosure may be read as interchangeable.

 例えば、1サブフレームはTTIと呼ばれてもよいし、複数の連続したサブフレームがTTIと呼ばれてよいし、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれてもよい。つまり、サブフレーム及びTTIの少なくとも一方は、既存のLTEにおけるサブフレーム(1ms)であってもよいし、1msより短い期間(例えば、1-13シンボル)であってもよいし、1msより長い期間であってもよい。なお、TTIを表す単位は、サブフレームではなくスロット、ミニスロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 For example, one subframe may be called a TTI, multiple consecutive subframes may be called a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be called a TTI. In other words, at least one of the subframe and the TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) in existing LTE, a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or a period longer than 1 ms. Note that the unit representing the TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc., instead of a subframe.

 ここで、TTIは、例えば、無線通信におけるスケジューリングの最小時間単位のことをいう。例えば、LTEシステムでは、基地局が各ユーザ端末に対して、無線リソース(各ユーザ端末において使用することが可能な周波数帯域幅、送信電力など)を、TTI単位で割り当てるスケジューリングを行う。なお、TTIの定義はこれに限られない。 Here, TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication. For example, in an LTE system, a base station schedules each user terminal by allocating radio resources (such as frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) in TTI units. Note that the definition of TTI is not limited to this.

 TTIは、チャネル符号化されたデータパケット(トランスポートブロック)、コードブロック、コードワードなどの送信時間単位であってもよいし、スケジューリング、リンクアダプテーションなどの処理単位となってもよい。なお、TTIが与えられたとき、実際にトランスポートブロック、コードブロック、コードワードなどがマッピングされる時間区間(例えば、シンボル数)は、当該TTIよりも短くてもよい。 The TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-coded data packet (transport block), a code block, a code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc. When a TTI is given, the time interval (e.g., the number of symbols) in which a transport block, a code block, a code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.

 なお、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれる場合、1以上のTTI(すなわち、1以上のスロット又は1以上のミニスロット)が、スケジューリングの最小時間単位となってもよい。また、当該スケジューリングの最小時間単位を構成するスロット数(ミニスロット数)は制御されてもよい。 Note that when one slot or one minislot is called a TTI, one or more TTIs (i.e., one or more slots or one or more minislots) may be the minimum time unit of scheduling. In addition, the number of slots (minislots) that constitute the minimum time unit of scheduling may be controlled.

 1msの時間長を有するTTIは、通常TTI(3GPP Rel.8-12におけるTTI)、ノーマルTTI、ロングTTI、通常サブフレーム、ノーマルサブフレーム、ロングサブフレーム、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。通常TTIより短いTTIは、短縮TTI、ショートTTI、部分TTI(partial又はfractional TTI)、短縮サブフレーム、ショートサブフレーム、ミニスロット、サブスロット、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 A TTI having a time length of 1 ms may be called a normal TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, normal subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc. A TTI shorter than a normal TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial or fractional TTI, shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.

 なお、ロングTTI(例えば、通常TTI、サブフレームなど)は、1msを超える時間長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよいし、ショートTTI(例えば、短縮TTIなど)は、ロングTTIのTTI長未満かつ1ms以上のTTI長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよい。 Note that a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, a subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms, and a short TTI (e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a TTI length shorter than the TTI length of a long TTI and equal to or greater than 1 ms.

 リソースブロック(Resource Block(RB))は、時間領域及び周波数領域のリソース割当単位であり、周波数領域において、1つ又は複数個の連続した副搬送波(サブキャリア(subcarrier))を含んでもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに関わらず同じであってもよく、例えば12であってもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに基づいて決定されてもよい。 A resource block (RB) is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be determined based on numerology.

 また、RBは、時間領域において、1つ又は複数個のシンボルを含んでもよく、1スロット、1ミニスロット、1サブフレーム又は1TTIの長さであってもよい。1TTI、1サブフレームなどは、それぞれ1つ又は複数のリソースブロックによって構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length. One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.

 なお、1つ又は複数のRBは、物理リソースブロック(Physical RB(PRB))、サブキャリアグループ(Sub-Carrier Group(SCG))、リソースエレメントグループ(Resource Element Group(REG))、PRBペア、RBペアなどと呼ばれてもよい。 In addition, one or more RBs may be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.

 また、リソースブロックは、1つ又は複数のリソースエレメント(Resource Element(RE))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、1REは、1サブキャリア及び1シンボルの無線リソース領域であってもよい。 Furthermore, a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs). For example, one RE may be a radio resource area of one subcarrier and one symbol.

 帯域幅部分(Bandwidth Part(BWP))(部分帯域幅などと呼ばれてもよい)は、あるキャリアにおいて、あるニューメロロジー用の連続する共通RB(common resource blocks)のサブセットのことを表してもよい。ここで、共通RBは、当該キャリアの共通参照ポイントを基準としたRBのインデックスによって特定されてもよい。PRBは、あるBWPで定義され、当該BWP内で番号付けされてもよい。 A Bandwidth Part (BWP), which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth, may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier, where the common RBs may be identified by an index of the RB relative to a common reference point of the carrier. PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within the BWP.

 BWPには、UL BWP(UL用のBWP)と、DL BWP(DL用のBWP)とが含まれてもよい。UEに対して、1キャリア内に1つ又は複数のBWPが設定されてもよい。 The BWP may include a UL BWP (BWP for UL) and a DL BWP (BWP for DL). One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.

 設定されたBWPの少なくとも1つがアクティブであってもよく、UEは、アクティブなBWPの外で所定の信号/チャネルを送受信することを想定しなくてもよい。なお、本開示における「セル」、「キャリア」などは、「BWP」で読み替えられてもよい。 At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP. Note that "cell," "carrier," etc. in this disclosure may be read as "BWP."

 なお、上述した無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルなどの構造は例示に過ぎない。例えば、無線フレームに含まれるサブフレームの数、サブフレーム又は無線フレームあたりのスロットの数、スロット内に含まれるミニスロットの数、スロット又はミニスロットに含まれるシンボル及びRBの数、RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数、並びにTTI内のシンボル数、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス(Cyclic Prefix(CP))長などの構成は、様々に変更することができる。 Note that the above-mentioned structures of radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols are merely examples. For example, the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, the symbol length, and the cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.

 また、本開示において説明した情報、パラメータなどは、絶対値を用いて表されてもよいし、所定の値からの相対値を用いて表されてもよいし、対応する別の情報を用いて表されてもよい。例えば、無線リソースは、所定のインデックスによって指示されてもよい。 In addition, the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using absolute values, may be represented using relative values from a predetermined value, or may be represented using other corresponding information. For example, a radio resource may be indicated by a predetermined index.

 本開示においてパラメータなどに使用する名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。さらに、これらのパラメータを使用する数式などは、本開示において明示的に開示したものと異なってもよい。様々なチャネル(PUCCH、PDCCHなど)及び情報要素は、あらゆる好適な名称によって識別できるので、これらの様々なチャネル及び情報要素に割り当てている様々な名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。 The names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any respect. Furthermore, the formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure. The various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any respect.

 本開示において説明した情報、信号などは、様々な異なる技術のいずれかを使用して表されてもよい。例えば、上記の説明全体に渡って言及され得るデータ、命令、コマンド、情報、信号、ビット、シンボル、チップなどは、電圧、電流、電磁波、磁界若しくは磁性粒子、光場若しくは光子、又はこれらの任意の組み合わせによって表されてもよい。 The information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies. For example, the data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.

 また、情報、信号などは、上位レイヤから下位レイヤ及び下位レイヤから上位レイヤの少なくとも一方へ出力され得る。情報、信号などは、複数のネットワークノードを介して入出力されてもよい。 In addition, information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.

 入出力された情報、信号などは、特定の場所(例えば、メモリ)に保存されてもよいし、管理テーブルを用いて管理してもよい。入出力される情報、信号などは、上書き、更新又は追記をされ得る。出力された情報、信号などは、削除されてもよい。入力された情報、信号などは、他の装置へ送信されてもよい。 Input/output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (e.g., memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input/output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be transmitted to another device.

 情報の通知は、本開示において説明した態様/実施形態に限られず、他の方法を用いて行われてもよい。例えば、本開示における情報の通知は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI)))、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報(マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))など)、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング)、その他の信号又はこれらの組み合わせによって実施されてもよい。 The notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods. For example, the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed by physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI)), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.

 なお、物理レイヤシグナリングは、Layer 1/Layer 2(L1/L2)制御情報(L1/L2制御信号)、L1制御情報(L1制御信号)などと呼ばれてもよい。また、RRCシグナリングは、RRCメッセージと呼ばれてもよく、例えば、RRC接続セットアップ(RRC Connection Setup)メッセージ、RRC接続再構成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)メッセージなどであってもよい。また、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))を用いて通知されてもよい。 The physical layer signaling may be called Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc. The RRC signaling may be called an RRC message, for example, an RRC Connection Setup message, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, etc. The MAC signaling may be notified, for example, using a MAC Control Element (CE).

 また、所定の情報の通知(例えば、「Xであること」の通知)は、明示的な通知に限られず、暗示的に(例えば、当該所定の情報の通知を行わないことによって又は別の情報の通知によって)行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of specified information (e.g., notification that "X is the case") is not limited to explicit notification, but may be implicit (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).

 判定は、1ビットで表される値(0か1か)によって行われてもよいし、真(true)又は偽(false)で表される真偽値(boolean)によって行われてもよいし、数値の比較(例えば、所定の値との比較)によって行われてもよい。 The determination may be based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented by true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (e.g., with a predetermined value).

 ソフトウェアは、ソフトウェア、ファームウェア、ミドルウェア、マイクロコード、ハードウェア記述言語と呼ばれるか、他の名称で呼ばれるかを問わず、命令、命令セット、コード、コードセグメント、プログラムコード、プログラム、サブプログラム、ソフトウェアモジュール、アプリケーション、ソフトウェアアプリケーション、ソフトウェアパッケージ、ルーチン、サブルーチン、オブジェクト、実行可能ファイル、実行スレッド、手順、機能などを意味するよう広く解釈されるべきである。 Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.

 また、ソフトウェア、命令、情報などは、伝送媒体を介して送受信されてもよい。例えば、ソフトウェアが、有線技術(同軸ケーブル、光ファイバケーブル、ツイストペア、デジタル加入者回線(Digital Subscriber Line(DSL))など)及び無線技術(赤外線、マイクロ波など)の少なくとも一方を使用してウェブサイト、サーバ、又は他のリモートソースから送信される場合、これらの有線技術及び無線技術の少なくとも一方は、伝送媒体の定義内に含まれる。 Software, instructions, information, etc. may also be transmitted and received via a transmission medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using at least one of wired technologies (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)), and/or wireless technologies (such as infrared, microwave, etc.), then at least one of these wired and wireless technologies is included within the definition of a transmission medium.

 本開示において使用する「システム」及び「ネットワーク」という用語は、互換的に使用され得る。「ネットワーク」は、ネットワークに含まれる装置(例えば、基地局)のことを意味してもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "system" and "network" may be used interchangeably. "Network" may refer to the devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).

 本開示において、「プリコーディング」、「プリコーダ」、「ウェイト(プリコーディングウェイト)」、「擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))」、「Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)」、「空間関係(spatial relation)」、「空間ドメインフィルタ(spatial domain filter)」、「送信電力」、「位相回転」、「アンテナポート」、「レイヤ」、「レイヤ数」、「ランク」、「リソース」、「リソースセット」、「ビーム」、「ビーム幅」、「ビーム角度」、「アンテナ」、「アンテナ素子」、「パネル」、「UEパネル」、「送信エンティティ」、「受信エンティティ」、などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "precoding", "precoder", "weight (precoding weight)", "Quasi-Co-Location (QCL)", "Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state)", "spatial relation", "spatial domain filter", "transmit power", "phase rotation", "antenna port", "layer", "number of layers", "rank", "resource", "resource set", "beam", "beam width", "beam angle", "antenna", "antenna element", "panel", "UE panel", "transmitting entity", "receiving entity", etc. may be used interchangeably.

 なお、本開示において、アンテナポートは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのアンテナポート(例えば、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))ポート)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、リソースは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのリソース(例えば、参照信号リソース、SRSリソースなど)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、リソースは、時間/周波数/符号/空間/電力リソースを含んでもよい。また、空間ドメイン送信フィルタは、空間ドメイン送信フィルタ(spatial domain transmission filter)及び空間ドメイン受信フィルタ(spatial domain reception filter)の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。 In the present disclosure, the antenna port may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port). In the present disclosure, the resource may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.). The resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources. The spatial domain transmission filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.

 上記グループは、例えば、空間関係グループ、符号分割多重(Code Division Multiplexing(CDM))グループ、参照信号(Reference Signal(RS))グループ、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))グループ、PUCCHグループ、アンテナポートグループ(例えば、DMRSポートグループ)、レイヤグループ、リソースグループ、ビームグループ、アンテナグループ、パネルグループなどの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.

 また、本開示において、ビーム、SRSリソースインジケーター(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))、CORESET、CORESETプール、PDSCH、PUSCH、コードワード(Codeword(CW))、トランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))、RSなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, beam, SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 また、本開示において、TCI状態、下りリンクTCI状態(DL TCI状態)、上りリンクTCI状態(UL TCI状態)、統一されたTCI状態(unified TCI state)、共通TCI状態(common TCI state)、ジョイントTCI状態などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, the terms TCI state, downlink TCI state (DL TCI state), uplink TCI state (UL TCI state), unified TCI state, common TCI state, joint TCI state, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 また、本開示において、「QCL」、「QCL想定」、「QCL関係」、「QCLタイプ情報」、「QCL特性(QCL property/properties)」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)特性」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, "QCL", "QCL assumptions", "QCL relationship", "QCL type information", "QCL property/properties", "specific QCL type (e.g., Type A, Type D) characteristics", "specific QCL type (e.g., Type A, Type D)", etc. may be read as interchangeable.

 本開示において、インデックス、識別子(Identifier(ID))、インジケーター(indicator)、インディケーション(indication)、リソースIDなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、シーケンス、リスト、セット、グループ、群、クラスター、サブセットなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms index, identifier (ID), indicator, indication, resource ID, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, the terms sequence, list, set, group, cluster, subset, etc. may be interchangeable.

 また、空間関係情報Identifier(ID)(TCI状態ID)と空間関係情報(TCI状態)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。「空間関係情報(TCI状態)」は、「空間関係情報(TCI状態)のセット」、「1つ又は複数の空間関係情報」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。TCI状態及びTCIは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。空間関係情報及び空間関係は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the spatial relationship information identifier (ID) (TCI state ID) and the spatial relationship information (TCI state) may be interchangeable. "Spatial relationship information (TCI state)" may be interchangeable as "set of spatial relationship information (TCI state)", "one or more pieces of spatial relationship information", etc. TCI state and TCI may be interchangeable. Spatial relationship information and spatial relationship may be interchangeable.

 本開示においては、「基地局(Base Station(BS))」、「無線基地局」、「固定局(fixed station)」、「NodeB」、「eNB(eNodeB)」、「gNB(gNodeB)」、「アクセスポイント(access point)」、「送信ポイント(Transmission Point(TP))」、「受信ポイント(Reception Point(RP))」、「送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))」、「パネル」、「セル」、「セクタ」、「セルグループ」、「キャリア」、「コンポーネントキャリア」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。基地局は、マクロセル、スモールセル、フェムトセル、ピコセルなどの用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Base Station (BS)", "Radio base station", "Fixed station", "NodeB", "eNB (eNodeB)", "gNB (gNodeB)", "Access point", "Transmission Point (TP)", "Reception Point (RP)", "Transmission/Reception Point (TRP)", "Panel", "Cell", "Sector", "Cell group", "Carrier", "Component carrier", etc. may be used interchangeably. Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, picocell, etc.

 基地局は、1つ又は複数(例えば、3つ)のセルを収容することができる。基地局が複数のセルを収容する場合、基地局のカバレッジエリア全体は複数のより小さいエリアに区分でき、各々のより小さいエリアは、基地局サブシステム(例えば、屋内用の小型基地局(Remote Radio Head(RRH)))によって通信サービスを提供することもできる。「セル」又は「セクタ」という用語は、このカバレッジにおいて通信サービスを行う基地局及び基地局サブシステムの少なくとも一方のカバレッジエリアの一部又は全体を指す。 A base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells. When a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also provide communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small base station for indoor use (Remote Radio Head (RRH))). The term "cell" or "sector" refers to a part or the entire coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services in this coverage.

 本開示において、基地局が端末に情報を送信することは、当該基地局が当該端末に対して、当該情報に基づく制御/動作を指示することと、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on the information.

 本開示においては、「移動局(Mobile Station(MS))」、「ユーザ端末(user terminal)」、「ユーザ装置(User Equipment(UE))」、「端末」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Mobile Station (MS)", "user terminal", "User Equipment (UE)", and "terminal" may be used interchangeably.

 移動局は、加入者局、モバイルユニット、加入者ユニット、ワイヤレスユニット、リモートユニット、モバイルデバイス、ワイヤレスデバイス、ワイヤレス通信デバイス、リモートデバイス、モバイル加入者局、アクセス端末、モバイル端末、ワイヤレス端末、リモート端末、ハンドセット、ユーザエージェント、モバイルクライアント、クライアント又はいくつかの他の適切な用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 A mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.

 基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、送信装置、受信装置、無線通信装置などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、移動体(moving object)に搭載されたデバイス、移動体自体などであってもよい。 At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be called a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc. In addition, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.

 当該移動体は、移動可能な物体をいい、移動速度は任意であり、移動体が停止している場合も当然含む。当該移動体は、例えば、車両、輸送車両、自動車、自動二輪車、自転車、コネクテッドカー、ショベルカー、ブルドーザー、ホイールローダー、ダンプトラック、フォークリフト、列車、バス、リヤカー、人力車、船舶(ship and other watercraft)、飛行機、ロケット、人工衛星、ドローン、マルチコプター、クアッドコプター、気球及びこれらに搭載される物を含み、またこれらに限られない。また、当該移動体は、運行指令に基づいて自律走行する移動体であってもよい。 The moving body in question refers to an object that can move, and the moving speed is arbitrary, and of course includes the case where the moving body is stationary. The moving body in question includes, but is not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, artificial satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these. The moving body in question may also be a moving body that moves autonomously based on an operating command.

 当該移動体は、乗り物(例えば、車、飛行機など)であってもよいし、無人で動く移動体(例えば、ドローン、自動運転車など)であってもよいし、ロボット(有人型又は無人型)であってもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、必ずしも通信動作時に移動しない装置も含む。例えば、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、センサなどのInternet of Things(IoT)機器であってもよい。 The moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, an autonomous vehicle, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned). Note that at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations. For example, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.

 図33は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。車両40は、駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49、各種センサ(電流センサ50、回転数センサ51、空気圧センサ52、車速センサ53、加速度センサ54、アクセルペダルセンサ55、ブレーキペダルセンサ56、シフトレバーセンサ57、及び物体検知センサ58を含む)、情報サービス部59と通信モジュール60を備える。 FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment. The vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.

 駆動部41は、例えば、エンジン、モータ、エンジンとモータのハイブリッドの少なくとも1つで構成される。操舵部42は、少なくともステアリングホイール(ハンドルとも呼ぶ)を含み、ユーザによって操作されるステアリングホイールの操作に基づいて前輪46及び後輪47の少なくとも一方を操舵するように構成される。 The drive unit 41 is composed of at least one of an engine, a motor, and a hybrid of an engine and a motor, for example. The steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handlebar), and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.

 電子制御部49は、マイクロプロセッサ61、メモリ(ROM、RAM)62、通信ポート(例えば、入出力(Input/Output(IO))ポート)63で構成される。電子制御部49には、車両に備えられた各種センサ50-58からの信号が入力される。電子制御部49は、Electronic Control Unit(ECU)と呼ばれてもよい。 The electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an Input/Output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle. The electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).

 各種センサ50-58からの信号としては、モータの電流をセンシングする電流センサ50からの電流信号、回転数センサ51によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の回転数信号、空気圧センサ52によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の空気圧信号、車速センサ53によって取得された車速信号、加速度センサ54によって取得された加速度信号、アクセルペダルセンサ55によって取得されたアクセルペダル43の踏み込み量信号、ブレーキペダルセンサ56によって取得されたブレーキペダル44の踏み込み量信号、シフトレバーセンサ57によって取得されたシフトレバー45の操作信号、物体検知センサ58によって取得された障害物、車両、歩行者などを検出するための検出信号などがある。 Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal of the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 acquired by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal acquired by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal acquired by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal of the accelerator pedal 43 acquired by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal of the brake pedal 44 acquired by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal of the shift lever 45 acquired by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. acquired by an object detection sensor 58.

 情報サービス部59は、カーナビゲーションシステム、オーディオシステム、スピーカー、ディスプレイ、テレビ、ラジオ、といった、運転情報、交通情報、エンターテイメント情報などの各種情報を提供(出力)するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。情報サービス部59は、外部装置から通信モジュール60などを介して取得した情報を利用して、車両40の乗員に各種情報/サービス(例えば、マルチメディア情報/マルチメディアサービス)を提供する。 The information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, for providing (outputting) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, and one or more ECUs that control these devices. The information service unit 59 uses information acquired from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.

 情報サービス部59は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよいし、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、LEDランプ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよい。 The information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, a microphone, a switch, a button, a sensor, a touch panel, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., a display, a speaker, an LED lamp, a touch panel, etc.) that perform output to the outside.

 運転支援システム部64は、ミリ波レーダ、Light Detection and Ranging(LiDAR)、カメラ、測位ロケータ(例えば、Global Navigation Satellite System(GNSS)など)、地図情報(例えば、高精細(High Definition(HD))マップ、自動運転車(Autonomous Vehicle(AV))マップなど)、ジャイロシステム(例えば、慣性計測装置(Inertial Measurement Unit(IMU))、慣性航法装置(Inertial Navigation System(INS))など)、人工知能(Artificial Intelligence(AI))チップ、AIプロセッサといった、事故を未然に防止したりドライバの運転負荷を軽減したりするための機能を提供するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。また、運転支援システム部64は、通信モジュール60を介して各種情報を送受信し、運転支援機能又は自動運転機能を実現する。 The driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions for preventing accidents and reducing the driver's driving load, such as a millimeter wave radar, a Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), a camera, a positioning locator (e.g., a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., a High Definition (HD) map, an Autonomous Vehicle (AV) map, etc.), a gyro system (e.g., an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), an Inertial Navigation System (INS), etc.), an Artificial Intelligence (AI) chip, and an AI processor, and one or more ECUs that control these devices. The driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize a driving assistance function or an autonomous driving function.

 通信モジュール60は、通信ポート63を介して、マイクロプロセッサ61及び車両40の構成要素と通信することができる。例えば、通信モジュール60は通信ポート63を介して、車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49内のマイクロプロセッサ61及びメモリ(ROM、RAM)62、各種センサ50-58との間でデータ(情報)を送受信する。 The communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63. For example, the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58 that are provided on the vehicle 40.

 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49のマイクロプロセッサ61によって制御可能であり、外部装置と通信を行うことが可能な通信デバイスである。例えば、外部装置との間で無線通信を介して各種情報の送受信を行う。通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49の内部と外部のどちらにあってもよい。外部装置は、例えば、上述の基地局10、ユーザ端末20などであってもよい。また、通信モジュール60は、例えば、上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つであってもよい(基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つとして機能してもよい)。 The communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with an external device. For example, it transmits and receives various information to and from the external device via wireless communication. The communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49. The external device may be, for example, the above-mentioned base station 10 or user terminal 20. The communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 (it may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).

 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49に入力された上述の各種センサ50-58からの信号、当該信号に基づいて得られる情報、及び情報サービス部59を介して得られる外部(ユーザ)からの入力に基づく情報、の少なくとも1つを、無線通信を介して外部装置へ送信してもよい。電子制御部49、各種センサ50-58、情報サービス部59などは、入力を受け付ける入力部と呼ばれてもよい。例えば、通信モジュール60によって送信されるPUSCHは、上記入力に基づく情報を含んでもよい。 The communication module 60 may transmit at least one of the signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49, information obtained based on the signals, and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59 to an external device via wireless communication. The electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may be referred to as input units that accept input. For example, the PUSCH transmitted by the communication module 60 may include information based on the above input.

 通信モジュール60は、外部装置から送信されてきた種々の情報(交通情報、信号情報、車間情報など)を受信し、車両に備えられた情報サービス部59へ表示する。情報サービス部59は、情報を出力する(例えば、通信モジュール60によって受信されるPDSCH(又は当該PDSCHから復号されるデータ/情報)に基づいてディスプレイ、スピーカーなどの機器に情報を出力する)出力部と呼ばれてもよい。 The communication module 60 receives various information (traffic information, signal information, vehicle distance information, etc.) transmitted from an external device and displays it on an information service unit 59 provided in the vehicle. The information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH) received by the communication module 60).

 また、通信モジュール60は、外部装置から受信した種々の情報をマイクロプロセッサ61によって利用可能なメモリ62へ記憶する。メモリ62に記憶された情報に基づいて、マイクロプロセッサ61が車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、各種センサ50-58などの制御を行ってもよい。 The communication module 60 also stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and the like provided on the vehicle 40.

 また、本開示における基地局は、ユーザ端末で読み替えてもよい。例えば、基地局及びユーザ端末間の通信を、複数のユーザ端末間の通信(例えば、Device-to-Device(D2D)、Vehicle-to-Everything(V2X)などと呼ばれてもよい)に置き換えた構成について、本開示の各態様/実施形態を適用してもよい。この場合、上述の基地局10が有する機能をユーザ端末20が有する構成としてもよい。また、「上りリンク(uplink)」、「下りリンク(downlink)」などの文言は、端末間通信に対応する文言(例えば、「サイドリンク(sidelink)」)で読み替えられてもよい。例えば、上りリンクチャネル、下りリンクチャネルなどは、サイドリンクチャネルで読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal. For example, each aspect/embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D), Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X), etc.). In this case, the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions of the base station 10 described above. Furthermore, terms such as "uplink" and "downlink" may be read as terms corresponding to terminal-to-terminal communication (for example, "sidelink"). For example, the uplink channel, downlink channel, etc. may be read as the sidelink channel.

 同様に、本開示におけるユーザ端末は、基地局で読み替えてもよい。この場合、上述のユーザ端末20が有する機能を基地局10が有する構成としてもよい。 Similarly, the user terminal in this disclosure may be interpreted as a base station. In this case, the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions of the user terminal 20 described above.

 本開示において、基地局によって行われるとした動作は、場合によってはその上位ノード(upper node)によって行われることもある。基地局を有する1つ又は複数のネットワークノード(network nodes)を含むネットワークにおいて、端末との通信のために行われる様々な動作は、基地局、基地局以外の1つ以上のネットワークノード(例えば、Mobility Management Entity(MME)、Serving-Gateway(S-GW)などが考えられるが、これらに限られない)又はこれらの組み合わせによって行われ得ることは明らかである。 In this disclosure, operations that are described as being performed by a base station may in some cases be performed by its upper node. In a network that includes one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination of these.

 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は単独で用いてもよいし、組み合わせて用いてもよいし、実行に伴って切り替えて用いてもよい。また、本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態の処理手順、シーケンス、フローチャートなどは、矛盾の無い限り、順序を入れ替えてもよい。例えば、本開示において説明した方法については、例示的な順序を用いて様々なステップの要素を提示しており、提示した特定の順序に限定されない。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. In addition, the processing procedures, sequences, flow charts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as there is no inconsistency. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present elements of various steps in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the particular order presented.

 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は、Long Term Evolution(LTE)、LTE-Advanced(LTE-A)、LTE-Beyond(LTE-B)、SUPER 3G、IMT-Advanced、4th generation mobile communication system(4G)、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、xth generation mobile communication system(xG(xは、例えば整数、小数))、Future Radio Access(FRA)、New-Radio Access Technology(RAT)、New Radio(NR)、New radio access(NX)、Future generation radio access(FX)、Global System for Mobile communications(GSM(登録商標))、CDMA2000、Ultra Mobile Broadband(UMB)、IEEE 802.11(Wi-Fi(登録商標))、IEEE 802.16(WiMAX(登録商標))、IEEE 802.20、Ultra-WideBand(UWB)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、その他の適切な無線通信方法を利用するシステム、これらに基づいて拡張、修正、作成又は規定された次世代システムなどに適用されてもよい。また、複数のシステムが組み合わされて(例えば、LTE又はLTE-Aと、5Gとの組み合わせなど)適用されてもよい。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure includes Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), LTE-Beyond (LTE-B), SUPER 3G, IMT-Advanced, 4th generation mobile communication system (4G), 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), xth generation mobile communication system (xG (x is, for example, an integer or decimal)), Future Radio Access (FRA), New-Radio The present invention may be applied to systems that use Access Technology (RAT), New Radio (NR), New radio access (NX), Future generation radio access (FX), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-Wide Band (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), and other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are expanded, modified, created, or defined based on these. In addition, multiple systems may be combined (for example, a combination of LTE or LTE-A and 5G, etc.).

 本開示において使用する「に基づいて」という記載は、別段に明記されていない限り、「のみに基づいて」を意味しない。言い換えれば、「に基づいて」という記載は、「のみに基づいて」と「に少なくとも基づいて」の両方を意味する。 As used in this disclosure, the phrase "based on" does not mean "based only on," unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase "based on" means both "based only on" and "based at least on."

 本開示において使用する「第1の」、「第2の」などの呼称を使用した要素へのいかなる参照も、それらの要素の量又は順序を全般的に限定しない。これらの呼称は、2つ以上の要素間を区別する便利な方法として本開示において使用され得る。したがって、第1及び第2の要素の参照は、2つの要素のみが採用され得ること又は何らかの形で第1の要素が第2の要素に先行しなければならないことを意味しない。 Any reference to an element using a designation such as "first," "second," etc., used in this disclosure does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must precede the second element in some way.

 本開示において使用する「判断(決定)(determining)」という用語は、多種多様な動作を包含する場合がある。例えば、「判断(決定)」は、判定(judging)、計算(calculating)、算出(computing)、処理(processing)、導出(deriving)、調査(investigating)、探索(looking up、search、inquiry)(例えば、テーブル、データベース又は別のデータ構造での探索)、確認(ascertaining)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 The term "determining" as used in this disclosure may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, "determining" may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., looking in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.

 また、「判断(決定)」は、受信(receiving)(例えば、情報を受信すること)、送信(transmitting)(例えば、情報を送信すること)、入力(input)、出力(output)、アクセス(accessing)(例えば、メモリ中のデータにアクセスすること)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 "Determining" may also be considered to mean "determining" receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in a memory), etc.

 また、「判断(決定)」は、解決(resolving)、選択(selecting)、選定(choosing)、確立(establishing)、比較(comparing)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。つまり、「判断(決定)」は、何らかの動作を「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。本開示において、「判断(決定)」は、上述した動作と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc. In other words, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" some kind of action. In this disclosure, "judgment (decision)" may be read as interchangeably with the actions described above.

 また、本開示において、「判断(決定)(determine/determining)」は、「想定する(assume/assuming)」、「期待する(expect/expecting)」、「みなす(consider/considering)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、「...することを想定しない」は、「...しないことを想定する」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, "determine/determining" may be interpreted interchangeably as "assume/assuming," "expect/expecting," "consider/considering," etc. Furthermore, in this disclosure, "does not expect to do..." may be interpreted interchangeably as "assumes not to do...."

 本開示において、「期待する(expect)」は、「期待される(be expected)」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。例えば、「...を期待する(expect(s) ...)」(”...”は、例えばthat節、to不定詞などで表現されてもよい)は、「...を期待される(be expected ...)」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。「...を期待しない(does not expect ...)」は、「...を期待されない(be not expected ...)」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、「装置Aは...を期待されない(An apparatus A is not expected ...)」は、「装置A以外の装置Bが、当該装置Aについて...を期待しない」と互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、装置AがUEである場合、装置Bは基地局であってもよい)。 In the present disclosure, "expect" may be read as "be expected". For example, "expect(s) ..." ("..." may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to infinitive, etc.) may be read as "be expected ...". "does not expect ..." may be read as "be not expected ...". Also, "An apparatus A is not expected ..." may be read as "An apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect ..." (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).

 本開示に記載の「最大送信電力」は送信電力の最大値を意味してもよいし、公称最大送信電力(the nominal UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよいし、定格最大送信電力(the rated UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよい。 The "maximum transmit power" referred to in this disclosure may mean the maximum value of transmit power, may mean the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or may mean the rated UE maximum transmit power.

 本開示において使用する「接続された(connected)」、「結合された(coupled)」という用語、又はこれらのあらゆる変形は、2又はそれ以上の要素間の直接的又は間接的なあらゆる接続又は結合を意味し、互いに「接続」又は「結合」された2つの要素間に1又はそれ以上の中間要素が存在することを含むことができる。要素間の結合又は接続は、物理的であっても、論理的であっても、あるいはこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。例えば、「接続」は「アクセス」で読み替えられてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "connected" and "coupled," or any variation thereof, refer to any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are "connected" or "coupled" to each other. The coupling or connection between the elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected" may be read as "access."

 本開示において、2つの要素が接続される場合、1つ以上の電線、ケーブル、プリント電気接続などを用いて、並びにいくつかの非限定的かつ非包括的な例として、無線周波数領域、マイクロ波領域、光(可視及び不可視の両方)領域の波長を有する電磁エネルギーなどを用いて、互いに「接続」又は「結合」されると考えることができる。 In this disclosure, when two elements are connected, they may be considered to be "connected" or "coupled" to one another using one or more wires, cables, printed electrical connections, and the like, as well as using electromagnetic energy having wavelengths in the radio frequency range, microwave range, light (both visible and invisible) range, and the like, as some non-limiting and non-exhaustive examples.

 本開示において、「AとBが異なる」という用語は、「AとBが互いに異なる」ことを意味してもよい。なお、当該用語は、「AとBがそれぞれCと異なる」ことを意味してもよい。「離れる」、「結合される」などの用語も、「異なる」と同様に解釈されてもよい。 In this disclosure, the term "A and B are different" may mean "A and B are different from each other." The term may also mean "A and B are each different from C." Terms such as "separate" and "combined" may also be interpreted in the same way as "different."

 本開示において、「含む(include)」、「含んでいる(including)」及びこれらの変形が使用されている場合、これらの用語は、用語「備える(comprising)」と同様に、包括的であることが意図される。さらに、本開示において使用されている用語「又は(or)」は、排他的論理和ではないことが意図される。 When the terms "include," "including," and variations thereof are used in this disclosure, these terms are intended to be inclusive, similar to the term "comprising." Additionally, the term "or," as used in this disclosure, is not intended to be an exclusive or.

 本開示において、例えば、英語でのa, an及びtheのように、翻訳によって冠詞が追加された場合、本開示は、これらの冠詞の後に続く名詞が複数形であることを含んでもよい。 In this disclosure, where articles have been added through translation, such as a, an, and the in English, this disclosure may include that the nouns following these articles are plural.

 本開示において、「以下」、「未満」、「以上」、「より多い」、「と等しい」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」、などを意味する文言は、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」などを意味する文言は、「i番目に」(iは任意の整数)を付けた表現として、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、「最高」は「i番目に最高」と互いに読み替えられてもよい)。 In this disclosure, terms such as "less than", "less than", "greater than", "more than", "equal to", etc. may be read as interchangeable. In addition, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good", "bad", "big", "small", "high", "low", "fast", "slow", "wide", "narrow", etc. may be read as interchangeable, not limited to positive, comparative and superlative. In addition, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good", "bad", "big", "small", "high", "low", "fast", "slow", "wide", "narrow", etc. may be read as interchangeable, not limited to positive, comparative and superlative, as expressions with "ith" (i is any integer) (for example, "best" may be read as "ith best").

 本開示において、「の(of)」、「のための(for)」、「に関する(regarding)」、「に関係する(related to)」、「に関連付けられる(associated with)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms "of," "for," "regarding," "related to," "associated with," etc. may be read interchangeably.

 本開示において、「Aのとき(場合)、B(when A, B)」、「(もし)Aならば、B(if A, (then) B)」、「Aの際にB(B upon A)」、「Aに応じてB(B in response to A)」、「Aに基づいてB(B based on A)」、「Aの間B(B during/while A)」、「Aの前にB(B before A)」、「Aにおいて(Aと同時に)B(B at( the same time as)/on A)」、「Aの後にB(B after A)」、「A以来B(B since A)」、「AまでB(B until A)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、ここでのA、Bなどは、文脈に応じて、名詞、動名詞、通常の文章など適宜適当な表現に置き換えられてもよい。なお、AとBの時間差は、ほぼ0(直後又は直前)であってもよい。また、Aが生じる時間には、時間オフセットが適用されてもよい。例えば、「A」は「Aが生じる時間オフセット前/後」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。当該時間オフセット(例えば、1つ以上のシンボル/スロット)は、予め規定されてもよいし、通知される情報に基づいてUEによって特定されてもよい。 In the present disclosure, "when A, B", "if A, (then) B", "B upon A", "B in response to A", "B based on A", "B during/while A", "B before A", "B at (the same time as)/on A", "B after A", "B since A", "B until A" and the like may be read as interchangeable. Note that A, B, etc. here may be replaced with appropriate expressions such as nouns, gerunds, and normal sentences depending on the context. Note that the time difference between A and B may be almost 0 (immediately after or immediately before). Also, a time offset may be applied to the time when A occurs. For example, "A" may be read interchangeably as "before/after the time offset at which A occurs." The time offset (e.g., one or more symbols/slots) may be predefined or may be identified by the UE based on signaled information.

 本開示において、タイミング、時刻、時間、時間インスタンス、任意の時間単位(例えば、スロット、サブスロット、シンボル、サブフレーム)、期間(period)、機会(occasion)、リソースなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, timing, time, duration, time instance, any time unit (e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe), period, occasion, resource, etc. may be interpreted as interchangeable.

 以上、本開示に係る発明について詳細に説明したが、当業者にとっては、本開示に係る発明が本開示中に説明した実施形態に限定されないということは明らかである。本開示の記載は、例示説明を目的とし、本開示に係る発明に対して何ら制限的な意味をもたらさない。 The invention disclosed herein has been described in detail above, but it is clear to those skilled in the art that the invention disclosed herein is not limited to the embodiments described herein. The description of the present disclosure is intended for illustrative purposes only and does not imply any limitations on the invention disclosed herein.

Claims (6)

 複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信する受信部と、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御する制御部と、を有し、
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含む、端末。
a receiver for receiving an instruction to switch to an uplink (UL) transmission utilizing a plurality of panels;
a control unit that controls panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of the switching,
The switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.
 前記制御部は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のSRSリソースセットに対応する特定のパラメータを更新する、請求項1に記載の端末。 The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit updates a specific parameter corresponding to the SRS resource set before the switch based on the information.  前記制御部は、前記情報に基づいて、切り替え前のパネルに対応するSRSリソースセットを、切り替え先のパネルに関連付けられるSRSリソースセットに切り替える、請求項1に記載の端末。 The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit switches the SRS resource set corresponding to the panel before switching to the SRS resource set associated with the panel to be switched to, based on the information.  前記受信部は、前記UL送信の切り替えの指示を下りリンク制御情報(DCI)を用いて受信し、
 前記DCIは、サポートされる最大パネル数に応じたSRSリソースインジケータフィールド、又は送信プリコーディング行列指標(TPMI)フィールドを含む、請求項1に記載の端末。
The receiving unit receives an instruction to switch the UL transmission using downlink control information (DCI);
The terminal of claim 1 , wherein the DCI includes an SRS resource indicator field according to a maximum number of panels supported or a transmit precoding matrix index (TPMI) field.
 複数のパネルを利用する上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を受信するステップと、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて、前記上りリンク送信のためのパネル切り替えを制御するステップと、を有し、
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含む、端末の無線通信方法。
receiving an indication to switch to uplink (UL) transmission utilizing multiple panels;
and controlling panel switching for the uplink transmission based on the instruction of switching;
The wireless communication method for a terminal, wherein the switching instruction includes information regarding a specific panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the specific panel.
 複数のパネルを利用する端末からの上りリンク(UL)送信に対する切り替えの指示を送信する送信部と、
 前記切り替えの指示に基づいて切り替えられたパネルを利用した前記端末からの上りリンク送信を受信する受信部と、を有し、
 前記切り替えの指示は、特定のパネルと、当該特定のパネルに関連付けられる測定用参照信号(SRS)リソースセットに関する情報を含む、基地局。
A transmitter that transmits a switching instruction for uplink (UL) transmission from a terminal that uses a plurality of panels;
a receiving unit that receives an uplink transmission from the terminal using the panel that has been switched based on the instruction to switch;
The base station, wherein the switching instruction includes information regarding a particular panel and a measurement reference signal (SRS) resource set associated with the particular panel.
PCT/JP2023/020098 2023-05-30 2023-05-30 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station Pending WO2024247110A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2023/020098 WO2024247110A1 (en) 2023-05-30 2023-05-30 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2023/020098 WO2024247110A1 (en) 2023-05-30 2023-05-30 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024247110A1 true WO2024247110A1 (en) 2024-12-05

Family

ID=93657171

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/020098 Pending WO2024247110A1 (en) 2023-05-30 2023-05-30 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024247110A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220094500A1 (en) * 2019-01-11 2022-03-24 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Methods and apparatuses that enable panel-specific configuration and transmission
US20220377810A1 (en) * 2020-01-29 2022-11-24 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Performing a listen-before-talk on beams and/or panels
WO2023281680A1 (en) * 2021-07-08 2023-01-12 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220094500A1 (en) * 2019-01-11 2022-03-24 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Methods and apparatuses that enable panel-specific configuration and transmission
US20220377810A1 (en) * 2020-01-29 2022-11-24 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Performing a listen-before-talk on beams and/or panels
WO2023281680A1 (en) * 2021-07-08 2023-01-12 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2025109733A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024195103A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024095473A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024247110A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024247109A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024247108A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024236654A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024209597A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024209596A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024209598A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024209595A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025017931A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025017930A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024195102A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024176454A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025069244A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024176455A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024181349A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024181350A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025009119A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024201856A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025041757A1 (en) Terminal, radio communication method, and base station
WO2025041756A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025088800A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2024219413A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23939589

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2025523746

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2025523746

Country of ref document: JP